WCC III - WCC Control Systems
Transcription
WCC III - WCC Control Systems
WCC III 3. WCC3.EXE Screen Descriptions TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 3: WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS How to Start or Run the WCC3.exe Program.......3-1 WCC III Main Menu Tool Bar ............................... 3-3 Logic Switch Summary Screen ........................ 3-76 Logic Switch Screen ...........................................................3-77 Binary Output Summary Screen....................... 3-81 WCC III Binary Output Board / V-Out Board ..... 3-83 Binary Output Screen .........................................................3-85 Special Purpose Keys ......................................... 3-8 Main Menu Screen ………………………………………3-10 Analog Input Summary Screen …………….………3-12 Alarm Summary Screen .................................... 3-87 Satellite Summary Screen ................................ 3-88 Rebuild Satellite Tables.................................... 3-90 Analog Input General Screen .............................................3-14 Analog Input Pulse Screen .................................................3-18 Override Screen ................................................ 3-91 Analog Input Thermistor Screen .........................................3-20 Analog Inputs......................................................................3-24 Holiday Schedule Screen ................................. 3-92 Analog Input Resistor Screen .............................................3-35 Analog Input Resistor+ Screen...........................................3-38 Analog Input RawCount Screen .........................................3-41 System Parameters Screen .............................. 3-94 Analog Input Thermistor+ Screen .......................................3-44 Operator Codes Screen......................................................3-98 Control Output Screens …….…………………….….3-51 On/Off and Units of Measure Control Output Summary Screen .......................................3-52 EA Driver Screen ................................................................3-54 Dual Limit Screen ...............................................................3-56 Messages Screen.............................................. 3-99 Alarm Messages Screen ................................. 3-100 Time Clock Screen .............................................................3-59 Control Outputs ..................................................................3-61 Secure the System ......................................... 3-101 Analog Output Summary Screen ...................... 3-63 Energy Consumption Screen .......................... 3-102 Analog Output Screen ........................................................3-65 Custom Screens .............................................. 3-105 WCC III System Logging ................................... 3-68 SAT Trend Log Summary Screen .......................................3-69 Bitmap Screens .............................................. 3-109 SAT Change of State Trend Log Screen ............................3-70 SAT Run Time Trend Log Screen .......................................3-71 SAT Analog Trend Trend Log Screen .................................3-73 SAT Analog Peak Trend Log Screen ..................................3-75 Network Information Screen .......................... 3-112 TABLE OF CONTENTS PID Programs .................................................. 3-113 Binary Global Summary Screen ..................... 3-160 Simple PID Programs Screen...........................................3-114 Binary Global Screen........................................................3-162 Modified PID Programs Screen ........................................3-116 Binary Global Combinatorial Mode Screen ......................3-163 Digital PID Programs Screen............................................3-117 Binary Global Compare Mode Screen ..............................3-165 PID Tuning Screen ...........................................................3-118 Binary Global External Mode Screen ...............................3-167 Binary Global Alarm Mode Screen ...................................3-169 Week Schedule Summary Screen .................. 3-120 Binary Global Alarm-By-Class Mode Screen ....................3-171 Week Schedule Screen ....................................................3-121 Binary Global One Shot Mode Screen .............................3-173 Binary Global Clock Mode Screen....................................3-175 Optimal Start Screen ...................................... 3-122 Binary Global Delay Mode Screen ...................................3-177 Binary Global PWM Mode Screen ....................................3-179 Analog Globals ................................................ 3-125 Binary Global Lead Lag Mode Screen..............................3-181 Analog Global Summary Screen ......................................3-126 Shed/Restore Screen ...................................... 3-184 Analog Global Screen.......................................................3-127 Analog Global Averaged List Screen ................................3-129 Analog Global Sorted List Screen ....................................3-130 Analog Global Integral Mode ............................................3-131 Analog Global Integral Mode Accumulation Mode............3-132 Analog Global Integral Mode Average Mode ....................3-134 Duty Cycle Screen .......................................... 3-186 Proportional Reset Screen ............................. 3-188 Proportional Reset Graph .................................................3-190 Analog Global Integral Mode Sliding Window Mode ........3-137 Analog Global Math Function Mode Screen .....................3-140 Tenant Override Utility List ............................ 3-191 Analog Global Look Up Table Mode .................................3-142 Analog Global External Mode Screen ..............................3-146 Useful Analog Actuator/Valve Control Information ............3-147 Analog Global Dual Valve Mode .......................................3-148 Analog Global Proportional Mode Screen ........................3-152 Analog Global Dual Ramp Mode Screen …………………3-154 Analog Global Multi-Proportion Mode Screen …………...3-156 Analog Global Pulse Start Mode Screen …………………3-158 General Message Screen................................ 3-193 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Running the WCC3 Program SECTION 3: WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS ____________________________________________________ How to Start or Run the WCC3.exe Program (SS5021) Using your mouse, left-click on the <Access Job The Remote Access Dialog Window will appear. Site> button. By selecting <OK>, the WCC3.exe program will now start to connect to the selected WCC III – MCD via this selected IP address connection. It should bring up the WCC III Set Password Dialog screen within a new window. If the IP address connection fails to connect to the WCC III – MCD, then another small dialog box window will appear. This is the Cannot Communicate to Backtask Dialog Box. The WCC3.exe shortcut icon should have been installed on your WCC III front end computer desktop with the WCC III Installation Software CD. The WCC III Installation Software CD is WattMaster Controls Part # DM1WC011-01X. To start the WCC3.exe program, double-click the left mouse button on the Shortcut Icon located on the Windows desktop. After a short period of time, dependent upon the CPU speed of your Windows based computer and the speed of your IP connection to the internet, the WCC III Type Connection Dialog Box will appear. If you click <Yes>, you will exit the WCC3.exe program. You will have to figure out why you cannot connect to the WCC III – MCD via the IP address connection. If you click <No>, you will not exit the WCC3.exe program, but instead you will be connected to the WCC III Main Menu. This connection to the WCC III Main Menu is not an actual IP connection, but rather a “dummy” WCC III main menu screen window with no values. This “dummy” WCC III main menu screen window will allow you to view and see what the actual WCC3.exe screens will look like – minus any data. Server IP Address: This is the static IP address of the WCC III – MCD. An IP Address is like a phone number on the world wide web. The IP address for the WCC III – MCD must be Static (does not change) as opposed to Dynamic (constantly changing). This static IP address must be provided by your internet service provider. (A static IP address is the preferred IP connection method for the WCC III system to function.) If you actually know the static IP address of the WCC III – MCD that you wish to connect to, please enter it here in the Server IP Address field, or better yet, continue to the Remote Access Dialog Window by selecting the <Access Job Site> button. You can use a Dynamic IP Address with the WCC III – MCD, but you must then have what is called a static “Host Name”. This static “Host name” must then be provided by your internet service provider and is limited to 58 total characters. Port Number: The WCC3.exe program opens a two-way, secure communications port that then allows for communication between the WCC III – MCD and the WCC3.exe program that is running on the WCC III Front end computer. This IP Address connection is done on a higher address port number than normal (WCC III connection is port number 39289) to help reduce the risk of computer hacking. WCC III Technical Guide In the Set Password Dialog Screen enter an “Operator:” identification and a “Code:” or password equal to at least a pass level 0 that has been previously set up on the WCCIII System Parameter – Operator Code Screen. (See the Operator Code Screen of the System Parameter Screen in Section 3 for information on setting up Operator Codes) Click <Check Password>, if the “Current Pass Level:” stays at 0 or higher (1, 2, or 3) then click <OK>. By selecting <OK>, the WCC3.exe program will now start to connect to the selected WCC III – MCD via this selected IP address connection. It should bring up the WCC III Main Menu within a new window. If the “Current Pass Level:” changes to –1 then you do not have access to the WCCIII – MCD. If you do not have access to the WCCIII – MCD and you click <OK> then this connection to the WCC III Main Menu is not an actual IP connection, but rather a “dummy” WCC III Main Menu window with no values. This “dummy” WCC III Main Menu window will allow you to view and see what the actual WCC3.exe screens will look like – minus any data. 3-1 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Running the WCC3 Program IP Address: This is the static IP address where the WCC III – MCD is located. An IP Address is like a phone number on the world wide web. The IP address for the WCC III – MCD must be static (does not change) as opposed to Dynamic (constantly changing). This static IP Address must be provided by your internet service provider. (A static IP address is the preferred IP connection method for the WCC III system to function.) Port Number: The Remote Access Dialog Box will allow you to enter multiple WCC III – MCD IP addresses based upon “Job Site” names. This is done by typing in the name of the jobsite you wish to call your system. First you must select a “BLANK” line in the bottom box area with your left mouse button. (This line will then be highlighted in “Blue”.) You must then enter a Job Site name in the “Job Site” field, along with the static IP address and Port number (39289) for the WCC III – MCD that you wish to connect to with the WCC3. exe program. If you are using a static “Host Name” instead of a static IP address please make sure that the Dynamic Address check box has been selected, along with the static “Host Name” in the space provided. As mentioned previously, you must get this static “Host Name” from your internet service provider, and it is limited to 58 characters total. Please note that this “Job Site” name will also be the name of a subdirectory that will automatically be created in the Local disk C:\ProgramFiles\WCCIII\WCC3 subdirectory on the WCC III Front end computer. The Remote Access Dialog Box also creates a JobSite.dat data file in the C:\ProgramFiles\WCCIII\WCC3 subdirectory. This data file is not a viewable type of file. The JobSite.dat file can be copied and then can be used on other WCC III front end computers. This reused JobSite.dat will then recreate the needed “Job Site” subdirectories on the other WCC III front end computers upon the reselection of the Job Site IP address. In an already filled out Remote Access Dialog Box, you can simply select from the list of previously entered Job Sites that are displayed in the bottom box field. Then left-click <OK>. This will take you back to the Connection Dialog Box that was first displayed. This Connection Dialog Box now should have the desired IP address in the Server IP Address location field and the port number (39289) in the Port Number location field for the WCC III – MCD that you wish to connect to with the WCC3.exe program. 3-2 The WCC3.exe program opens a two-way, secure communications port that then allows for communication between the WCC III – MCD and the WCC3.exe program that is running on the WCC III front end computer. This IP Address connection is done on a higher address port number than normal (WCC III connection is port number 39289) to help reduce the risk of computer hacking. Job Site: This is the name of the jobsite you wish to call your system. Please note that this name will also be the name of a subdirectory that will automatically be created in the Local disk C:\ProgramFiles\ WCCIII\WCC3 subdirectory. Host Name: You can use a Dynamic IP Address with the WCC III – MCD, but you must then have what is called a static “Host Name”. This static “Host name” must then be provided by your internet service provider and is limited to 58 total characters. When you have filled out all necessary fields, left-click <OK>. This will take you back to the Connection Dialog Box that was first displayed. This Connection Dialog Box now should have the desired IP address in the Server IP Address location field and the port number (39289) in the Port Number location field for the WCC III – MCD that you wish to connect to with the WCC3.exe program. Left-click <Cancel> to return to the Connection Dialog Box that was first displayed. The Connection Dialog Box will have the same IP address as listed originally before in the Server IP Address location field and the port number (39289) in the Port Number location field. Left-click <Print> to send all of this data in this Remote Access Dialog Box to your Windows system default printer on the WCC III front end computer. This print function is provided to give you a hard paper backup copy of these IP address for the various WCC III – MCD that you may have. This print function also creates a Printscreen.dat data file in the C:\ProgramFiles\WCCIII\WCC3 subdirectory. This data file is not a viewable type of file. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS WCC III Main Menu Tool Bar WCC III Main Menu Tool Bar When you open the WCC III program and each of its available screens, you will notice that the name of the screen will appear in brackets at the top of the window, for example WCC III - [Main Menu Screen]. Under that is what is referred to as the Top Menu Bar. In the Top Menu Bar are the menus <File>, <Edit>, <View>, <Window>, <Action>, <PassLevel>, and <Help>. File Menu View Menu The <View> menu gives you the option to show or hide the Toolbar and Status Bar. A checkmark indicates Show. No checkmark indicates Hide. You can also view the Satellite Map. If you choose this option, the Satellite Map will appear on the screen. Press <Esc> to return to the WCC III Main Menu. Window Menu The <File> menu contains the functions <Print>, <Print Preview> - preview your print job before printing, <Print Setup> - setup your printer and printing options, <Print To File> - print to a file in order to print the file at a later date, <Upload Slide Screen Files> - saves all information for the Custom Screens and Bitmap Screens on this WCCIII front end to the WCCIII – MCD, <Download Slide Screen Files> - downloads all information for the Custom Screens and Bitmap Screens to this WCCIII front end from the WCCIII – MCD. Edit Menu The <Window> menu allows you to open more than one screen at a time. Each screen is contained in its own window. <Cascade> will arrange all windows into a stack, with each window offset slightly. <Tile> will display all windows equally without overlapping. <Arrange Icons> - This function is not available at this time. <Open> - This function is not available at this time. To activate a window, click the window title bar or choose the name of the window in the <Window> menu. Multiple windows are numbered in the order they were opened. The <Edit> menu contains four functions; however, only <Copy> and <Paste> are available for use. These functions work the same as <Set Current Screen for Copying> and <Copy Screen From Previous Screen> located in the <Action> menu. WCC III Technical Guide 3-3 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS WCC III Main Menu Tool Bar Action Menu To set up the printing schedule for each screen, you must then select <Action>, <Edit Print Screen Schedule>. The Edit Print Screen Program Window will pop-up. You can select the printing schedule by time, interval, or global binary. If you select <At Time>, the At Hour: and Minute: fields will appear. Enter the time of day with a two-digit hour value (military time) and a two-digit minute value. The hour value should be less than 24, and the minute value should be less than 60. If you select <With Interval>, the Interval: field will appear. Enter the interval and select minutes, hours, or days from the drop down menu. The interval should be less than 256 and greater than 0. If you select <Global Binary>, the Global Binary Number: field will appear. Enter a global binary number. If you wish to temporarily remove the screen from the print schedule, select <None> from the drop down menu. The global binary value should be less than or equal to 512 and greater than 0. The <Action> menu has many functions. These functions’ availability are tied to individual screens. Available menu items will be bolded. Edit Print Screen Schedule/ Add Current Screen <Edit Print Screen Schedule> and <Add Current Screen for Print Screen Schedule> are used to The first two menu items automatically generate screen prints based on the schedule you set up for each screen. While in a screen, if you select <Action>, <Add Current Screen to Print Screen Schedule>, the screen will be immediately added to the Print Screen Schedule Program. You must click <Change> to have the system accept the assigned schedule. If you wish to remove a screen from the schedule, highlight the screen name and then click <Delete>. To print a screen immediately, highlight the screen name and then click <Print>. Click <Exit> to exit the program. Set Current Screen for Copying To copy a set of data points from one satellite to the next, while at the point you wish to copy from the current screen or within the same satellite, select <Action>,<Set Current Screen for Copying>. A message similar to the following will appear at the bottom of the screen: Point __ of Satellite __ was tagged for copy! 3-4 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS WCC III Main Menu Tool Bar Copy Screen From Previous Screen While at the Home position at the screen you wish to copy the data to, select <Action>,<Copy Screen From Previous Screen>. The data point will be copied from the previous screen to the current screen. Clear Structure While at the Home position on the screen, select <Action>, <Clear Structure> to clear/remove the data from the screen. This works the same as pressing <Ctrl><Home>. Acknowledge Alarm/Acknowledge All Alarms Select <Action>,<Acknowledge Alarm> to acknowledge a single alarm. Select <Action>,<Acknowledge All Alarms> to acknowledge all alarms on the Alarm Summary Screen. NOTE: Acknowledge All Alarms only works with the Alarm Summary Screen. Clear Error/Clear All Errors While at the Satellite Summary Screen, select <Action>,<Clear Error> to clear an error located in the ERR column. You must have the desired row highlighted in order to do this. Select <Action>,<Clear All Errors> to clear all errors. To rebuild all tables, type a zero in the Satellite Number field and select <Rebuild All Tables>. To rebuild one table, enter the satellite number and then select <Rebuild One Table>. Set Simulate Satellite/Clear Simulate Satellite While at the Satellite Summary Screen, highlight an empty satellite entry and then select <Action>,<Set Simulate Satellite> to create a simulated satellite. Select <Action>,<Clear Simulate Satellite> to reverse this process. Clear the TOS/Clear all TOS TOS stands for TUC off the system which means the satellite is no longer communicating with the Wcc3 system. To clear the alarm once communications are reestablished, do the following: While at the Satellite Summary Screen, select <Action>,<Clear the TOS> or <Clear all TOS> to clear one or more TUCs that are off the system. Looking Back in Time You have the ability to view information for any month, day, and year and time of day. The data is saved in the BACKTASK folder on the hard drive. Select <Action>, <Looking Back in Time>. The Back to Time Dialog Window will pop-up. Delete Satellite While at the Satellite Summary Screen, you can delete a satellite by placing the cursor on the satellite you wish to delete and selecting <Action>,<Delete Satellite>. Force Search Satellite While at the Satellite Summary Screen, you can search for a satellite by placing the cursor at a satellite number you know to exist but is lacking data, by selecting <Action>,<Force Search Satellite>. Rebuild Satellite Unit/Pattern Table While at the Satellite Summary Screen, you can rebuild satellite tables by selecting <Action>, <Rebuild Satellite Unit/Pattern Table>. The following window will appear: Use the arrow buttons at the top to move through months and years. Select the day of the month by clicking on it. Type in the hour of the day in two-digit military format. Then select <OK>. The WCC III system will retrieve the data from the entered date and time. To return to the current date and time, simply select <Action>,<Looking Back in Time> again. Save As Current Once you retrieve data from the hard disk, you can save the data to the satellite. This may be necessary if someone entered the wrong data for a satellite, for example. To save the retrieved data to the satellite as the current data, select <Action>, <Save As Current>. WCC III Technical Guide 3-5 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS WCC III Main Menu Tool Bar Plot When data is available to graph, for example, in the Trend Logs screens, you can select <Action>,<Plot> and the data will be plotted on a graph. This works the same as pressing <Ctrl><G>. Search Description At any time while running WCC III, you can search for a description. Select <Action>,<Search Description>. The following window will appear: Reset While in the Trend Log screens, you can select <Action>,<Reset> to reset the screen. This works the same as pressing <Ctrl><R> Set Color At any time when running WCC III, you can change your screen colors. Select <Action>,<Set Color> and the following window will appear: Enter your description in the Description field and then select example in the window shows a search for Room. When the Search is complete, double click on the result you want to look at and its screen will appear. To return to the Search Description Screen, press <Home>. <Start Search>. The Search Logic Address At any time while running WCC III, you can search for a logic address. Select <Action>,<Search Logic Address>. The Search Logic Address Window will appear: 3-6 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS WCC III Main Menu Tool Bar When you click inside the Search For field, the Edit Logic Address Dialog Window will appear: You can select by Satellite Number and Point Number or by Global Index and then select <OK>. Your selection should appear in the Search For field in the Search Logic Address Window. Then click <Start Search>. When the Search is complete, double click on the result you want to look at, and its screen will appear. To return to the Search Logic Address Screen, press <Home>. Logic Address Tree The Logic Address Tree allows you to see how the system connects together. At any time while running WCC III, you can select <Action>,<Logic Address Tree>. The Edit Logic Address Dialog Window will appear. See window above. You can select by Satellite Number and Point Number or by Global Index and then select <OK>. Your selection will appear in the Logic Address Tree View Window. Double-click the left mouse button to expand and collapse the tree. Click the right mouse button to go to that data point’s screen. WCC III Technical Guide Auto E-mail Auto e-mail enables/disables emails in the Backtask program. You must be a Level 4 user to access this option. PassLevel The PassLevel is a quick way to change a person’s passcode level. Select <PassLevel> from the Main Menu Toolbar. The Set Password Dialog Box will appear: Enter the Operator ID and Code. They will appear as asterisks for security purposes. Click <Check Password> to verify the password and display the designated level access. You can also access this operation in the System Parameters Screen. Help The <Help> menu displays the About Wcc3 window which contains the version number of the software along with WattMaster Control’s company information. It is important to know the version number when calling WattMaster Control’s Technical Support. Select <OK> to exit the window. 3-7 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Special Purpose Keys Special Purpose Keys The special purpose keys are a very powerful and necessary part of the WCC III system, but they can also be very dangerous if you are not sure how to use them. Therefore, most of the special purpose keys require that the operator have a Level 3 passcode. <Ctrl><A>: Acknowledge Alarms—Used at the Analog Input Summary Screen, Trend Log Run Time Screen, Alarm Summary Screen, and Global Analog/Binary Summary Screen. <Ctrl><G>: Display Graphs—Used at the Analog Trend Screen, Proportional Reset Screen, and the Look-up Table Screen to plot data. <Ctrl><K>: Clear Communication Errors—Used at Satellite Summary Screen for troubleshooting, clears communication errors on a single satellite. <Ctrl><R>: Manually Reset (Clear) Data—Used at the Trend Log Screen, Global Analog Integral Mode to reset accumulated consumption, Energy Consumption Screen to reset consumption. <Ctrl><Home>: Clear Input Data from Present Screen (clear structure)—Cursor must be in the Home position on the screen. <Ctrl><U> Toggle Updating—Used on Custom Screens and Bitmap Screens to “freeze/unfreeze” the data being displayed. <Ctrl><F> Find Logic Address—Used on Custom Screens and Bitmap Screens to find the exact location where a point was placed on the screen. <Ctrl><D> Delete Logic Address—Used on Custom Screens and Bitmap Screens to delete the location where a point was placed on the screen. 3-8 <Ctrl><A>: Acknowledge Alarms When an alarm occurs within the system, the alarm condition appears on its respective summary screen as a flashing display generally on the right side of the screen. Once the alarm has been acknowledged, one of two possible conditions will be displayed. The first condition is when an alarm is acknowledged, but the alarm remains outside of the alarm limits. When this happens, the alarm information is still displayed on the screen, but it appears solid instead of blinking. The second condition is when an alarm is acknowledged AND the alarm is inside the alarm limits. In this case, all alarm information for that point is cleared from the screen. To acknowledge new (blinking) alarms, position the cursor (>) at the point for which you wish to acknowledge alarms. Once positioned, press and hold <Ctrl>, then press <A>, and then release both keys at the same time. <Ctrl><G>: Display Graphs The WCC III system has graphs for the Analog Trend Screen, the Proportional Reset Screen, and the Look-Up Table Screen that can be displayed on the screen and can be printed on the printer using the <File>, <Print> command. The graph for the Analog Trend - Trend Logging Screen is accessed while the cursor is at the Home position of an Analog Trend Screen. Press <Ctrl><G>. Press the <Home> key to return to the Analog Trend Screen. The Proportional Reset Screen also has a graph that can be accessed by pressing <Ctrl><G> while the cursor is anywhere on the Proportional Reset Screen. Press the <Home> key to return to the Proportional Reset Screen. To access the graph for the Look-Up Tables (GA 121-128), while the cursor is at any position on a Global Analog Look-Up Table, press <Ctrl><G> to display the Look-Up Table graph. Press the <Home> key to return to the Global Analog Look-Up Table. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Special Purpose Keys <Ctrl><K>: Clear Communication Errors The WCC III system keeps track of the transmission and receive errors between the MCD Internet appliance and the satellite controllers on the Satellite Summary Screen. The <Ctrl><K> feature clears the existing number of errors and is used for troubleshooting purposes. <Ctrl><R>: Reset Trend Logs or Global Analog Accumulation Screens <Ctrl><Home>: Clear Input Data from Present Screen You must be a Level 3 user for <Ctrl><Home> to work. <Each screen (or point) has data which is saved in the memory of the MCD or the satellite controller. Before any processing of the data entered on a screen is performed, the system checks the point’s “structure valid” indicator to insure that the data it contains is valid and properly formed. If the point is not valid, then that point is skipped and processing continues with the next point. In addition, all summary data is removed from that point’s summary screen. When you are at a Trend Logging Screen and wish to reset (clear) the existing trend log data on the particular screen, simply press <Ctrl><R>. This should automatically reset (clear) the data on the Trend Log Screen. On new systems, the Trend Log Screens should be reset before they have been programmed to clear out any “bad data” that might be in the satellite controller. To clear a screen (invalidate it), the cursor must be in the “Home” position on the individual screen that is to be cleared. Once there, press <Ctrl><Home>. The data on the screen should be cleared away. Once you have cleared a point, the data for that point is lost, and it cannot be recovered. Therefore, make sure you have the right point before using <Ctrl><Home>. The <Ctrl><R> feature is also used to reset the global analogs using the integral mode and the Energy Consumption Screen. <Ctrl-U>: Toggle Updating If the system is trying to e-mail-out an alarm and it cannot report its information for some reason, the system will continue to try and e-mail the call-out forever unless you press <Ctrl><R> while the cursor is at the “Disabled by” position for that alarm type on the System Parameters Screen. The values of the WCC III points on the Custom Screen are “dynamic.” That is, the values on the screen will change as the value of the point changes. However, you have the option of “freezing” the points at their present value by pressing <Ctrl> and <U> while the Custom Screen is displayed on the monitor. To return to “live” data, press <Ctrl> and <U> again. <Ctrl-F> and <Ctrl-D>: Delete a Point Address on the Custom Screen To delete a point on the Custom Screen, first you must have the cursor in the exact location it was when the point was placed on the screen. To simplify finding this location, you may move the cursor near the existing point and then press <Ctrl> and <F> simultaneously to cause the cursor to move to the exact position where the point was created. You may delete the point by pressing <Ctrl> and <D> simultaneously, and then pressing <Enter>. The four slashes (////) will then appear. You may enter a new point, or to remove the slashes, leave the screen by pressing <Home> twice, and then re-access the screen. WCC III Technical Guide 3-9 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Main Menu Screen MAIN MENU SCREEN ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 08:11 1/20 WATTMASTER CONTROL CENTER III WCC III Sat #____ Analog Input Control Output Analog Output Trend Logs Logic Switches Binary Output Overview Alarm Summary Satellite Summary Overrides Holidays System Parameters On/Off/Units Messages Alarm Messages Secure the System Energy Consumption Custom Screens Bitmap Screens Network Information Central Unit PID Programs Week Schedules Optimal Starts Analog Globals Binary Globals Shed/Restore Programs Duty Cycle Programs Proportional Programs Tenant Override General Message Active alarms in classes: 16 WCC III Version 2.21 BACKTASK Version 2.18 L The Main Menu Screen allows you to view the available screens within the WCC III system. To get to a screen listed on the Main Menu, use the arrow keys to position the cursor over the name of the screen you want to access and press <Enter>. The Main Menu is divided into three categories: Sat #, Overview, and Central Unit. Sat #____ The information associated with the screens within this category is stored in the satellite controllers and IS NOT stored in the MCD. It is a very good idea to save this information on a back-up disk by using the Satellite Save/Restore program located in the WCC Utility Program. Overview This section allows the operator to perform operations and view screens which affect all of the satellite controllers on the system. 3-10 The information associated with the screens located in this category is stored in the MCD. When the screens in this category are programmed for the first time, or when a change is made to these screens, the system automatically stores the information on the data disk. Central Unit The screens located in this category are GLOBAL commands. Global commands “travel” along the two-wire communication loop and are used by any or all of the satellite controllers. All of the satellites are constantly monitoring this information but only certain satellites will react to the information depending on how they have been programmed. The information associated with the screens located in this category is stored in the MCD. When the screens in this category are programmed for the first time or when a change is made to these screens, the system automatically stores the information on the hard drive disk. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Main Menu Screen Active alarms in classes: If an alarm is active within the system, the alarm type number will appear at this location. You will need to go to the Alarm Summary Screen to locate the specific alarm. If the alarm is highlighted, it has not been acknowledged. If the number is not highlighted, all of the alarms in that class have been acknowledged. WCC III Version _.__ BACKTASK Version _.__ The version number of the software presently being used by the WCC III system will appear at these locations. Backtask is a portion of the WCC III software. Each version of the WCC III software operates with a specific version of Backtask. This has been added to insure that the right version of Backtask is operating with the WCC III software. WCC III Technical Guide 3-11 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Summary Screen Analog Input Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXAY, where XXX = Satellite Address, A = Analog Input, and Y = 1-8 ANALOG INPUT SUMMARY SCREEN ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Analog Inputs Satellite 1 S1-KC Analog Inputs Current Value Alarm Limits Stat Mode 50.0 Deg F 65.0 80.0 ON 0 Deg F 45.0 65.0 OFF 0 Deg F -10.0 100.0 ON 0 Deg F 45.0 100.0 ON Description A1: S1-A1 A2: S1-A2 A3: S1-A3 A4: S1-A4 A5: S1-A5 A6: S1-A6 A7: S1-A7 A8: S1-A8 9.0 99.0 C1: C2: C3: C4: C5: C6: C7: C8: OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Time 08:22 Alarm Date 01/20 Details Deg F Deg F HOME for menu An analog input is a signal sent to the satellite controller that can be represented by a number such as temperature, pressure, etc. The Analog Input Screen is used to “tell” the WCC III system the characteristics of the sensor and to set alarm limits. The “Binary Setpoint” option at the bottom of the Analog Input Screen can be used to convert the analog input to a binary (On/Off) input. Analog Inputs Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Analog Input, Control Output, Analog Output, Trend Logging, Logic Switch, Binary Output> You can access one of the screens which appear in this choice field without returning to the Main Menu by pressing the <space bar> until the desired summary type has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. 3-12 Satellite______ Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently communicating with. If you would like to view the analog input summary data for a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this field, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. 1 to 239. To view or edit a specific analog input, use the arrow keys to move the cursor (shown as “>” along the left-hand side of the screen) to the desired point and press <Enter>. The Analog Input Screen for the specified point will now appear. Time / Date The present time and date will automatically appear at these locations. Description:_______________ The description message which was entered on the Analog Input Screen is displayed here to help you identify the different analog inputs within the system. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Summary Screen Current Value Mode The current value of the analog input is automatically displayed here. The “alt” message will appear here when the alternate alarm limits are active. When the input value which has been entered on the Analog Input Screen to select the alternate alarm limits is “ON,” the WCC III system will use the “Alternate Alarm Limits” and the “alt” message will be displayed here. Alarm Limits The alarm limits which were input on the Analog Input Screens will automatically be displayed here. Stat The present “ON” or “OFF” status of the binary input which is controlling the schedule for the alarm limits is shown here. For example, if week schedule #1 (W1) has been input to control the schedule of the alarm limits, the message “ON” will appear here when week schedule #1 is “ON” and “OFF” will appear when week schedule #1 is “OFF”. When W1 is “ON” the “On Schedule” alarm limits will be active, and when W1 if “OFF” the Off Schedule” alarm limits will be active. Alarm Details This location will automatically display the alarm message, the high or low value of the analog input, and the time and date of the occurrence of the peak value. When an alarm occurs, the alarm message will blink on the screen. To acknowledge an alarm, position the cursor at the point for which you wish to acknowledge the alarm. Then press <Alt><A> or left-click on <Action> to bring up the <Action> menu at which point you can select <Acknowledge Alarm> or <Acknowledge All Alarms>. NOTE: The <Acknowledge All Alarms> option will only work on the Alarm Summary Screen. At this point, one of two things should happen. If the value of the analog input is presently within the alarm limits, the message will disappear. If the value of the analog input is not within the alarm limits, the message will stay on the screen, but it will quit blinking. WCC III Technical Guide 3-13 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input General Screen Analog Input Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXAY, where XXX = Satellite Address, A = Analog Input, and Y = 1-8 ANALOG INPUT GENERAL SCREEN Satellite # 1 ANALOG INPUT # 1 Description: RM101 Type: Analog General Pattern for values associated with this input: xxx.x Units @ 0% scale: 0.0 DEG. Units of Measure message #: 1 @ full scale: 100.0 DEG. Filter time constant: 8 seconds ALARMS Controlled by: W1 Alarm Type: 1 Alarm Message #’s: Low 2 High 1 Alternate limits selected by: .... Limit overlap time after control change: 20 minutes OFF Above OFF Below Limits On Off Low 65.0 50.0 On (alt) Off (alt) 0.0 0.0 Local set 55.0 BINARY SETPOINT 0.0 DEG. 0.0 DEG. On Message #: Off Message #: High 80.0 100.0 DEG. DEG. 0.0 0.0 DEG. DEG. 90.0 DEG. 0 0 HOME for menu Satellite # _______ Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this field, type in the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. Additionally, this field specifies the point number to edit. For the Analog Input Screen, this number can range from one to eight, corresponding from A1 to A8, respectively. If you would like to edit a different point, move the cursor to this field by using the arrow keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>. Analog Input # ________ Description: This “field” actually contains two separate fields. The first field specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: A short message is entered here which is displayed on Summary Screens to help you remember points within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed). <ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT, TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) 3-14 Type: Analog General This field is automatically filled in by the system. On screens 2-8, this will always read “ANALOG.” On screen number 1, it will read either “ANALOG” or “PULSE” depending on the position of the pulse switch on the satellite controller. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input General Screen Sensor Type This is a choice field for Analog types only. A list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <General, Thermistor, Resistor, Resistor+, RawCount, Thermistor+> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired Analog Type has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. General = A general use user programmable analog input screen. Pulse = Specifies the calibration information for the pulse meter connected to channel 1 of the satellite controller. Units @ 0% scale: @ Full scale: If the screen type is “ANALOG,” this specifies the scaling information used by the system to proportionally scale the input value to the desired range. The raw input value to the satellite controller ranges from zero to one volt. If the scaling information has been set to 0 at 0% scale, and 100 at Full scale, a raw input value of 0.6 volts would produce a scaled value of 60. If the screen type is “PULSE,” this specifies the calibration information for the pulse meter connected to channel 1 of the satellite controller. The first input is a “choice” field, and therefore a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen. _______ Pulses = _______ Hours Thermistor = Used to setup WattMaster 10K type 3 curve thermistors. Resistor = Used to measure resistance of a variable potentiometer. Resistor+ = Used to setup different types of thermistors. WattMaster thermistors are 10K type 3 curve. You would enter values on the screen to correspond to different values and type curves of thermistors. RawCount = Is the raw count value straight from the 12 bit A to D converter. Used for testing and or calibrating to see if the analog signal is linear, so that you may test the non-linear curve of any sensor to determine if any offset is needed. Thermistor+ = To be used if you are using a thermistor type sensor that WattMaster Controls has not provided. Other thermistor type sensors can be connected to the Satellite controller’s analog inputs with this screen. Please consult the WattMaster Controls factory for all other thermistor type sensors that you wish to connect to the Satellite Controller. WattMaster Controls can provide the correct b0, b1, b3 values at our option. Pattern for Values Associated With This Input: Specifies where you would like the decimal point to appear in the value displayed by the system. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: < x,xxx , xxx.x , xx.xx , x.xxx > You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. < 100, 1000 > The second input is used to “scale” or “calibrate” the particular sensor that is being used. For example, consider a pulse meter which measures the kwh of a building. Electrical meters are basically a small motor whose speed is proportional to power being used. Let’s consider a meter where one revolution equals one kwh, and the meter sends 5 pulses to the satellite controller for every 6 revolutions. Therefore, we would enter “100 Pulses = 120 kwh Hours.” (NOTE: maximum pulse rate allowed = 4 pulses per second.) 5 pulses = 6 revolutions 1 revolution = 1 kwh 5 pulses = 6 kwh 100 pulses = 120 kwh Units of Measure Message #: 1 A number is entered here that references a message on the On/Off Units Messages Screen. For example, if units-of-measure message #1 is “Deg F,” entering “1” will cause “Deg F” to be displayed as the units-of-measure for the analog input. Filter Time Constant: ____ Seconds Specifies the sampling rate of the analog input. This is used by the satellites to “filter” (or smooth) the analog input signal. This can be used on inputs that “jump around” to reduce sporadic load control. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: < 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 > You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired filter time constant has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. WCC III Technical Guide 3-15 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input General Screen ------ALARMS------ Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for LOW alarms and the second for any HIGH alarms. These numbers are used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen. There are two fields on this screen that determine which set of limits are active—the status of the “Controlled by” field and the status of the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. When the value that has been input in the “Controlled by” field is ON, either the “On” limits or the “On (Alt)” limits are active depending on the status of the value input in the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. If the value in the “Alternate” field is On, the “On (Alt)” limits are used, and when the “Alternate” value is OFF, the “On” limits are used. Alternate Limits Active Alarm Controlled by: Selected by: Limits: On Off On On On On (Alt) Off Off Off Off On Off (Alt) The local set alarm limits become active if the MCD quits communicating with the satellite controller. After communications are re-established, any alarms that occurred while the satellite was in local set will be reported. Alternate Limits Selected By: Limit overlap time after control change: Specifies the point that initiates the Alternate mode. When this address is zero (or OFF), the Normal alarm limits are selected; when it is one (or ON), the Alternate alarm limits are selected. This specifies the amount of time the WCC software will wait after a control change (i.e., on/off schedule, alternate mode, local set mode) before deciding to generate an alarm. The first input is a user-entered number from 1 to 60, and the second input is either seconds or minutes. This second input is a “choice” field; the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Controlled by: Specifies the binary value that selects the ON or OFF alarm limits. When this value is OFF, the OFF alarm limits are selected; when it is ON, the ON alarm limits are selected. Alarm Type: Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) Alarm Message # Low: ___ High: ___ Limits On Off On (alt) Off (alt) Local Set Low _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ High _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F <Seconds, Minutes> This group of inputs specifies the alarm limits for the “Normal,” “Alternate,” and “Local Set” modes. Each mode has a LOW and HIGH limit. When the value of the analog input goes out of these limits, an alarm is generated, and the alarm will automatically display and e-mail out. 3-16 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input General Screen ------ BINARY SETPOINTS -----____Above:____ ____Below:____ <ON, OFF> These inputs are used to convert the analog signal to a binary (On/ Off) signal. The value that is going ON and OFF is a software point referred to as a comparator. Each analog input has a comparator associated with it named “Cn.” The comparator for analog input #1 is “C1,” analog input number 2 is “C2,” and so on. The status of the comparator can be seen on the Analog Input Summary Screen. When the user has selected: Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: The value of the comparator is: OFF Above & OFF Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is equal to either one or between the two setpoints. OFF Above & ON Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is less than or equal to BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint. ON Above & OFF Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is less than or equal to the BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint. ON Above & ON Below: OFF when the Analog input value is equal to either one or between the two setpoints, and ON when the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint. WCC III Technical Guide You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice is selected and then pressing <Enter>. On Message #: Off Message #: Specifies a pair of message numbers, the first for the ON state and the second for the OFF state of the comparator. These numbers are used by the system to reference a message on the ON/OFF Units Message Screen. For example, the comparator might be set up to come on when the outside air temperature is below 55 °F for economizer operation. Set up the On/Off Message Screen so that message #3 is “ECON” and message #4 is “REFRIG.” The “On Message” number would be “3” (ECON), and the “OFF Message” number would be “4” (REFRIG). 3-17 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Pulse Screen Analog Input Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXAY, where XXX = Satellite Address, A = Analog Input, and Y = 1-8 ANALOG INPUT PULSE SCREEN Satellite # _______ Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this field, type in the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. Analog Input # ________ This “field” actually contains two separate fields. The first field specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT, TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) 3-18 Additionally, this field specifies the point number to edit. For the Analog Input Screen, this number can range from one to eight, corresponding from A1 to A8, respectively. If you would like to edit a different point, move the cursor to this field by using the arrow keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>. Description: A short message is entered here which is displayed on Summary Screens to help you remember points within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed). Type: Pulse This field is automatically filled in by the system. On screens 2-8, this will always read “ANALOG.” On screen number 1, it will read either “ANALOG” or “PULSE” depending on the position of the pulse switch on the satellite controller. Pulse specifies the calibration information for the pulse meter connected to channel 1 of the satellite controller. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Pulse Screen Pattern for Values Associated With This Input: Filter Time Constant: ____ Seconds Specifies where you would like the decimal point to appear in the value displayed by the system. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Specifies the sampling rate of the analog input. This is used by the satellites to “filter” (or smooth) the analog input signal. This can be used on inputs that “jump around” to reduce sporadic load control. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: < x,xxx , xxx.x , xx.xx , x.xxx > You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. Units of Measure Message #: 2 A number is entered here that references a message on the On/Off Units Messages Screen. For example, if units-of-measure message #2 is “Deg F,” entering “2” will cause “Deg F” to be displayed as the units-of-measure for the analog input. 100 Pulses = 120 KW Hours If the screen type is “ANALOG,” this specifies the scaling information used by the system to proportionally scale the input value to the desired range. The raw input value to the satellite controller ranges from zero to one volt. If the scaling information has been set to 0 at 0% scale, and 100 at Full scale, a raw input value of 0.6 volts would produce a scaled value of 60. If the screen type is “PULSE,” this specifies the calibration information for the pulse meter connected to channel 1 of the satellite controller. _______ Pulses = _______ Hours The first input is a “choice” field, and therefore a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen. < 100, 1000 > < 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 > You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired filter time constant has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. ------ALARMS-----Controlled by: Specifies the binary value that selects the ON or OFF alarm limits. When this value is OFF, the OFF alarm limits are selected; when it is ON, the ON alarm limits are selected. Alarm Type: Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) Alarm Message # Low: ___ High: ___ Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for LOW alarms and the second for any HIGH alarms. These numbers are used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen. Alternate Limits Selected By: You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired amount of pulses has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. Specifies the point that initiates the Alternate mode. When this address is zero (or OFF), the Normal alarm limits are selected; when it is one (or ON), the Alternate alarm limits are selected. The second input is used to “scale” or “calibrate” the particular sensor that is being used. For example, consider a pulse meter which measures the kwh of a building. Electrical meters are basically a small motor whose speed is proportional to power being used. Let’s consider a meter where one revolution equals one kwh, and the meter sends 5 pulses to the satellite controller for every 6 revolutions. Therefore, we would enter “100 Pulses = 120 kwh Hours.” (NOTE: maximum pulse rate allowed = 4 pulses per second.) Limits On Off On (alt) Off (alt) Local Set 5 pulses = 6 revolutions 1 revolution = 1 kwh 5 pulses = 6 kwh 100 pulses = 120 kwh WCC III Technical Guide Low _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ High _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F This group of inputs specifies the alarm limits for the “Normal,” “Alternate,” and “Local Set” modes. Each mode has a LOW and HIGH limit. When the value of the analog input goes out of these limits, an alarm is generated, and the alarm will automatically display and e-mail out. 3-19 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Pulse Screen There are two fields on this screen that determine which set of limits are active—the status of the “Controlled by” field and the status of the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. When the value that has been input in the “Controlled by” field is ON, either the “On” limits or the “On (Alt)” limits are active depending on the status of the value input in the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. If the value in the “Alternate” field is On, the “On (Alt)” limits are used, and when the “Alternate” value is OFF, the “On” limits are used. Alternate Limits Active Alarm Controlled by: Selected by: Limits: On Off On On On On (Alt) Off Off Off Off On Off (Alt) The local set alarm limits become active if the MCD quits communicating with the satellite controller. After communications are re-established, any alarms that occurred while the satellite was in local set will be reported. ------ BINARY SETPOINTS -----____Above:____ ____Below:____ These inputs are used to convert the analog signal to a binary (On/ Off) signal. The value that is going ON and OFF is a software point referred to as a comparator. Each analog input has a comparator associated with it named “Cn.” The comparator for analog input #1 is “C1,” analog input number 2 is “C2,” and so on. The status of the comparator can be seen on the Analog Input Summary Screen. When the user has selected: OFF Above & OFF Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is equal to either one or between the two setpoints. OFF Above & ON Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is less than or equal to BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint. ON Above & OFF Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is less than or equal to the BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint. ON Above & ON Below: OFF when the Analog input value is equal to either one or between the two setpoints, and ON when the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint. Limit overlap time after control change: This specifies the amount of time the WCC software will wait after a control change (i.e., on/off schedule, alternate mode, local set mode) before deciding to generate an alarm. The first input is a user-entered number from 1 to 60, and the second input is either seconds or minutes. This second input is a “choice” field; the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: The value of the comparator is: <Seconds, Minutes> Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ON, OFF> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice is selected and then pressing <Enter>. On Message #: Off Message #: Specifies a pair of message numbers, the first for the ON state and the second for the OFF state of the comparator. These numbers are used by the system to reference a message on the ON/OFF Units Message Screen. For example, the comparator might be set up to come on when the outside air temperature is below 55 °F for economizer operation. Set up the On/Off Message Screen so that message #3 is “ECON” and message #4 is “REFRIG.” The “On Message” number would be “3” (ECON), and the “OFF Message” number would be “4” (REFRIG). 3-20 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Thermistor Screen Analog Input Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXAY, where XXX = Satellite Address, A = Analog Input, and Y = 1-8 ANALOG INPUT THERMISTOR SCREEN Satellite # _______ Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this field, type in the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. Additionally, this field specifies the point number to edit. For the Analog Input Screen, this number can range from one to eight, corresponding from A1 to A8, respectively. If you would like to edit a different point, move the cursor to this field by using the arrow keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>. Analog Input # ________ Description: This “field” actually contains two separate fields. The first field specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: A short message is entered here which is displayed on Summary Screens to help you remember points within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed). <ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT, TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) WCC III Technical Guide Type: Analog Thermistor This field is automatically filled in by the system. On screens 2-8, this will always read “ANALOG.” On screen number 1, it will read either “ANALOG” or “PULSE” depending on the position of the pulse switch on the satellite controller. 3-21 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Thermistor Screen Sensor Type Offset: This is a choice field for Analog types only. A list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: There is an option to change the calibration of a thermistor sensor (Usually due to the position or location of the thermistor sensor) a few degrees plus or minus from the actual temperature that the thermistor sensor is actually reading. Acceptable values in this field are numerical with both positive and negative (+/-) values. <General, Thermistor, Resistor, Resistor+, RawCount, Thermistor+> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired Analog Type has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. Thermistor = Used to setup WattMaster 10K type 3 curve thermistors. NOTE: The associated analog input jumper on the satellite controller must also be set to “THERM” in order for this screen to display the proper temperature value. Pattern for Values Associated With This Input: Specifies where you would like the decimal point to appear in the value displayed by the system. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Units of Measure Message #: 1 A number is entered here that references a message on the On/Off Units Messages Screen. For example, if units-of-measure message #1 is “Deg F,” entering “1” will cause “Deg F” to be displayed as the units-of-measure for the analog input. Filter Time Constant: ____ Seconds Specifies the sampling rate of the analog input. This is used by the satellites to “filter” (or smooth) the analog input signal. This can be used on inputs that “jump around” to reduce sporadic load control. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: < 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 > You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired filter time constant has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. < x,xxx , xxx.x , xx.xx , x.xxx > You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. ------ALARMS-----Controlled by: Specifies the binary value that selects the ON or OFF alarm limits. When this value is OFF, the OFF alarm limits are selected; when it is ON, the ON alarm limits are selected. Degree Type: Specifies how you would like the temperature displayed, in Fahrenheit or Celsius. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: < ºF, ºC > You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired temperature choice has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. Alarm Type: Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) Alarm Message # Low: ___ High: ___ Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for LOW alarms and the second for any HIGH alarms. These numbers are used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen. Alternate Limits Selected By: Specifies the point that initiates the Alternate mode. When this address is zero (or OFF), the Normal alarm limits are selected; when it is one (or ON), the Alternate alarm limits are selected. 3-22 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Thermistor Screen Limits On Off On (alt) Off (alt) Local Set Low _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ High _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F This group of inputs specifies the alarm limits for the “Normal,” “Alternate,” and “Local Set” modes. Each mode has a LOW and HIGH limit. When the value of the analog input goes out of these limits, an alarm is generated, and the alarm will automatically display and e-mail out. There are two fields on this screen that determine which set of limits are active—the status of the “Controlled by” field and the status of the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. When the value that has been input in the “Controlled by” field is ON, either the “On” limits or the “On (Alt)” limits are active depending on the status of the value input in the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. If the value in the “Alternate” field is On, the “On (Alt)” limits are used, and when the “Alternate” value is OFF, the “On” limits are used. Alternate Limits Active Alarm Controlled by: Selected by: Limits: On Off On On On On (Alt) Off Off Off Off On Off (Alt) The local set alarm limits become active if the MCD quits communicating with the satellite controller. After communications are re-established, any alarms that occurred while the satellite was in local set will be reported. Limit overlap time after control change: This specifies the amount of time the WCC software will wait after a control change (i.e., on/off schedule, alternate mode, local set mode) before deciding to generate an alarm. The first input is a user-entered number from 1 to 60, and the second input is either seconds or minutes. This second input is a “choice” field; the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Seconds, Minutes> ------ BINARY SETPOINTS -----____Above:____ ____Below:____ These inputs are used to convert the analog signal to a binary (On/ Off) signal. The value that is going ON and OFF is a software point referred to as a comparator. Each analog input has a comparator associated with it named “Cn.” The comparator for analog input #1 is “C1,” analog input number 2 is “C2,” and so on. The status of the comparator can be seen on the Analog Input Summary Screen. When the user has selected: The value of the comparator is: OFF Above & OFF Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is equal to either one or between the two setpoints. OFF Above & ON Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is less than or equal to BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint. ON Above & OFF Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is less than or equal to the BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint. ON Above & ON Below: OFF when the Analog input value is equal to either one or between the two setpoints, and ON when the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ON, OFF> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice is selected and then pressing <Enter>. On Message #: Off Message #: Specifies a pair of message numbers, the first for the ON state and the second for the OFF state of the comparator. These numbers are used by the system to reference a message on the ON/OFF Units Message Screen. For example, the comparator might be set up to come on when the outside air temperature is below 55 °F for economizer operation. Set up the On/Off Message Screen so that message #3 is “ECON” and message #4 is “REFRIG.” The “On Message” number would be “3” (ECON), and the “OFF Message” number would be “4” (REFRIG). WCC III Technical Guide 3-23 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Screen 3-24 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Screen 2 WIRE THERMISTOR TYPE - Thermistor Scaling Factor FLUSHMOUNT SENSOR (WM PART # OE210) 10K OHM TYPE 3 THERMISTOR +V 1 TO 8 ATI YS101724 REV. 0 R1 TB1 TM GND AUX OUT NONE LOAD RESISTOR T SHLD R RV2 GND TB2 C1 1 TO 8 S1 V OUT CONNECTIONS ON SAT III CONTROLLER RV1 P1 JOX Identify the Sensor Circuit Board YS# YS101724 WCC III Technical Guide THERM 0-10V 0-5V 0-1V ANALOG INPUT SCALING - From Sat Analog Input Screen Description: Type: Thermistor Pattern for values associated with this input: xxx.x Degree Type: F Units of measure message#: 1 Filter time constant: 0 Seconds An Input Load Resistor must not be used. Internally, the SAT III controller calculates the resistance of the thermistor back to a Voltage so that the SAT III controller can calculate the proper temperature. RX corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input load resistor. Example as follows: R1 is for Analog Input #1 (NO RESISTOR SHOULD BE INSTALLED) R8 is for Analog Input #8 (NO RESISTOR SHOULD BE INSTALLED) Testing with an Ohmmeter: Disconnected from the SAT III controller, measure from TMP to GND on the sensor. You should get an ohm meter measurement that corresponds to the Temperature. 10,000 ohms equals 77.0 DegF Input Jumper must be set to THERM There are berg jumpers that are under the SAT III cover that must be set. JOX corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input jumper. Example: JO1 is for Analog Input #1 JO8 is for Analog Input #8 3-25 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Screen 3 WIRE VOLTAGE TYPE - 0 to 1 Volt Scaling Factor FLUSHMOUNT SENSOR (WM PART # OE222) +V 1 TO 8 R3 R2 TB1 C1 TMP ATI ORANGE WIRE BROWN WIRE ATI NONE LOAD RESISTOR RV1 GND TB1 R1 U1 YS101545 REV. 2 VIOLET WIRE AUX OUT GND C2 S1 LM-34 Type Temp Sensor 1 TO 8 V OUT RV2 ANALOG INPUT SCALING - From Sat Analog Input Screen Description: Type: Analog General Pattern for values associated with this input: xxx.x Units @ 0 % Scale 0.0 DegF Units of measure message #: 1 @ full scale: 100.0 DegF Filter time constant: 8 Seconds An Input Load Resistor must not be used to convert the Voltage so that the SAT III controller can calculate the proper temperature. RX corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input load resistor. Example as follows: R1 is for Analog Input #1 (NO RESISTOR SHOULD BE INSTALLED) R8 is for Analog Input #8 (NO RESISTOR SHOULD BE INSTALLED) Testing with a voltmeter: Measure from ATI to GND. You should get a voltage measurement that corresponds to the Temperature. 0.72 Volts DC equals 72.0 Deg F CONNECTIONS ON SAT III CONTROLLER JOX THERM 0-10V 0-5V 0-1V Identify the Sensor Circuit Board YS# YS101545 Input Jumper must be set to 0-1V There are berg jumpers that are under the SAT III cover that must be set. JOX corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input jumper. Example: JO1 is for Analog Input #1 JO8 is for Analog Input #8 3 WIRE VOLTAGE TYPE - 0 to 5 Volt Scaling Factor FLUSHMOUNT SENSOR (WM PART # OE222) +V 1 TO 8 R3 R2 TB1 C1 TMP ATI ORANGE WIRE BROWN WIRE ATI NONE LOAD RESISTOR RV1 GND U1 YS101545 REV. 2 VIOLET WIRE AUX OUT TB1 R1 GND C2 S1 LM-34 Type Temp Sensor 1 TO 8 V OUT RV2 CONNECTIONS ON SAT III CONTROLLER JOX Identify the Sensor Circuit Board YS# YS101545 3-26 THERM 0-10V 0-5V 0-1V ANALOG INPUT SCALING - From Sat Analog Input Screen Description: Type: Analog General Pattern for values associated with this input: xxx.x Units @ 0 % Scale 0.0 Deg F Units of measure message #: 1 @ full scale: 500.0 Deg F Filter time constant: 8 Seconds An Input Load Resistor must not be used to convert the Voltage so that the SAT III controller can calculate the proper temperature. RX corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input load resistor. Example as follows: R1 is for Analog Input #1 (NO RESISTOR SHOULD BE INSTALLED) R8 is for Analog Input #8 (NO RESISTOR SHOULD BE INSTALLED) Testing with a voltmeter: Measure from ATI to GND. You should get a voltage measurement that corresponds to the Temperature. 0.72 Volts DC equals 72.0 Deg F Input Jumper must be set to 0-5V There are berg jumpers that are under the SAT III cover that must be set. JOX corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input jumper. Example: JO1 is for Analog Input #1 JO8 is for Analog Input #8 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Screen WCC III Technical Guide 3-27 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Screen 3-28 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Screen WCC III Technical Guide 3-29 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Screen not 3-30 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Screen WCC III Technical Guide 3-31 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Screen ANALOG INPUT AS AN ANALOG SWITCH INPUT - Thermistor Scaling Factor 0-1V INPUT ANALOG INPUT SCALING - From Sat Analog Input Screen +V 1 TO 8 ATI NO LOAD RESISTOR SWITCH BY OTHERS GND 1 TO 8 V OUT CONNECTIONS ON SAT III CONTROLLER JOX THERM 0-10V 0-5V 0-1V Description: Type: Analog General Pattern for values associated with this input: xxx.x Units @ 0 % Scale 0.0 Deg F Units of measure message #: 1 @ full scale: 100.0 Deg F Filter time constant: 0 Seconds ===========Binary Setpoint =========== OFF above 80.0 Deg F On Message #: ON ON below 50.0 Deg F Off Message #: OFF An Input Load Resistor must not be used as a pull down resistor, because the required 5 volts comes from the Thermistor pull up resistor. RX corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input load resistor. Example as follows: R1 is for Analog Input #1 R4 is for Analog Input #4 R6 is for Analog Input #6 R8 is for Analog Input #8 Testing with a voltmeter: Measure from ATI to GND. You should get a voltage measurement that corresponds to the ON / OFF. 5.0 Volts DC equals OFF The V-Out output is not used for this application. Input Jumper must be set to THERM There are berg jumpers that are under the SAT III cover that must be set. JOX corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input jumper. Example: JO1 is for Analog Input #1 JO8 is for Analog Input #8 ANALOG INPUT AS AN ANALOG SWITCH INPUT - Thermistor Scaling Factor 0-5V INPUT ANALOG INPUT SCALING - From Sat Analog Input Screen +V 1 TO 8 ATI NO LOAD RESISTOR SWITCH BY OTHERS GND 1 TO 8 V OUT CONNECTIONS ON SAT III CONTROLLER JOX THERM 0-10V 0-5V 0-1V 3-32 Description: Type: Analog General Pattern for values associated with this input: xxx.x Units @ 0 % Scale 0.0 Deg F Units of measure message #: 1 @ full scale: 500.0 Deg F Filter time constant: 0 Seconds ===========Binary Setpoint =========== OFF above 400.0 Deg F On Message #: ON ON below 100.0 Deg F Off Message #: OFF An Input Load Resistor must not be used as a pull down resistor, because the required 5 volts comes from the Thermistor pull up resistor. RX corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input load resistor. Example as follows: R1 is for Analog Input #1 R4 is for Analog Input #4 R6 is for Analog Input #6 R8 is for Analog Input #8 Testing with a voltmeter: Measure from ATI to GND. You should get a voltage measurement that corresponds to the ON / OFF. 5.0 Volts DC equals OFF The V-Out output is not used for this application. Input Jumper must be set to THERM There are berg jumpers that are under the SAT III cover that must be set. JOX corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input jumper. Example: JO1 is for Analog Input #1 JO8 is for Analog Input #8 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Screen FOR 0-10 VOLT INPUTS WCC III Technical Guide 3-33 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Screen 3-34 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Resistor Screen Analog Input Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXAY, where XXX = Satellite Address, A = Analog Input, and Y = 1-8 ANALOG INPUT RESISTOR SCREEN Satellite # _______ Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this field, type in the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. Additionally, this field specifies the point number to edit. For the Analog Input Screen, this number can range from one to eight, corresponding from A1 to A8, respectively. If you would like to edit a different point, move the cursor to this field by using the arrow keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>. Analog Input # ________ Description: This “field” actually contains two separate fields. The first field specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: A short message is entered here which is displayed on Summary Screens to help you remember points within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed). <ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT, TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) WCC III Technical Guide Type: Analog Resistor This field is automatically filled in by the system. On screens 2-8, this will always read “ANALOG.” On screen number 1, it will read either “ANALOG” or “PULSE” depending on the position of the pulse switch on the satellite controller. 3-35 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Resistor Screen ------ALARMS------ Sensor Type This is a choice field for Analog types only. A list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <General, Thermistor, Resistor, Resistor+, RawCount, Thermistor+> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired Analog Type has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. Resistor is used to measure resistace of a variable potentiometer. Available inputs are 0 to 9999 ohms, NOTE: The associated analog input jumper on the satellite controller must also be set to “THERM” in order for this screen to display the proper temperature value. Pattern for Values Associated With This Input: Specifies where you would like the decimal point to appear in the value displayed by the system. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: < x,xxx , xxx.x , xx.xx , x.xxx > You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. Units of Measure Message #: 16 A number is entered here that references a message on the On/Off Units Messages Screen. For example, if units-of-measure message #16 is “Ohms,” entering “16” will cause “Ohms” to be displayed as the units-of-measure for the analog input. Controlled by: Specifies the binary value that selects the ON or OFF alarm limits. When this value is OFF, the OFF alarm limits are selected; when it is ON, the ON alarm limits are selected. Alarm Type: Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) Alarm Message # Low: ___ High: ___ Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for LOW alarms and the second for any HIGH alarms. These numbers are used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen. Alternate Limits Selected By: Specifies the point that initiates the Alternate mode. When this address is zero (or OFF), the Normal alarm limits are selected; when it is one (or ON), the Alternate alarm limits are selected. Limits On Off On (alt) Off (alt) Local Set Low _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ High _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F This group of inputs specifies the alarm limits for the “Normal,” “Alternate,” and “Local Set” modes. Each mode has a LOW and HIGH limit. When the value of the analog input goes out of these limits, an alarm is generated, and the alarm will automatically display and e-mail out. Filter Time Constant: ____ Seconds Specifies the sampling rate of the analog input. This is used by the satellites to “filter” (or smooth) the analog input signal. This can be used on inputs that “jump around” to reduce sporadic load control. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: < 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 > You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired filter time constant has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. 3-36 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Resistor Screen There are two fields on this screen that determine which set of limits are active—the status of the “Controlled by” field and the status of the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. When the value that has been input in the “Controlled by” field is ON, either the “On” limits or the “On (Alt)” limits are active depending on the status of the value input in the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. If the value in the “Alternate” field is On, the “On (Alt)” limits are used, and when the “Alternate” value is OFF, the “On” limits are used. Alternate Limits Active Alarm Controlled by: Selected by: Limits: On Off On On On On (Alt) Off Off Off Off On Off (Alt) The local set alarm limits become active if the MCD quits communicating with the satellite controller. After communications are re-established, any alarms that occurred while the satellite was in local set will be reported. ------ BINARY SETPOINTS -----____Above:____ ____Below:____ These inputs are used to convert the analog signal to a binary (On/ Off) signal. The value that is going ON and OFF is a software point referred to as a comparator. Each analog input has a comparator associated with it named “Cn.” The comparator for analog input #1 is “C1,” analog input number 2 is “C2,” and so on. The status of the comparator can be seen on the Analog Input Summary Screen. When the user has selected: OFF Above & OFF Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is equal to either one or between the two setpoints. OFF Above & ON Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is less than or equal to BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint. ON Above & OFF Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is less than or equal to the BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint. ON Above & ON Below: OFF when the Analog input value is equal to either one or between the two setpoints, and ON when the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint. Limit overlap time after control change: This specifies the amount of time the WCC software will wait after a control change (i.e., on/off schedule, alternate mode, local set mode) before deciding to generate an alarm. The first input is a user-entered number from 1 to 60, and the second input is either seconds or minutes. This second input is a “choice” field; the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: The value of the comparator is: <Seconds, Minutes> Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ON, OFF> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice is selected and then pressing <Enter>. On Message #: Off Message #: Specifies a pair of message numbers, the first for the ON state and the second for the OFF state of the comparator. These numbers are used by the system to reference a message on the ON/OFF Units Message Screen. For example, the comparator might be set up to come on when the outside air temperature is below 55 °F for economizer operation. Set up the On/Off Message Screen so that message #3 is “ECON” and message #4 is “REFRIG.” The “On Message” number would be “3” (ECON), and the “OFF Message” number would be “4” (REFRIG). WCC III Technical Guide 3-37 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Resistor+ Screen Analog Input Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXAY, where XXX = Satellite Address, A = Analog Input, and Y = 1-8 ANALOG INPUT RESISTOR+ SCREEN Satellite # _______ Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this field, type in the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. Additionally, this field specifies the point number to edit. For the Analog Input Screen, this number can range from one to eight, corresponding from A1 to A8, respectively. If you would like to edit a different point, move the cursor to this field by using the arrow keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>. Analog Input # ________ Description: This “field” actually contains two separate fields. The first field specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: A short message is entered here which is displayed on Summary Screens to help you remember points within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed). <ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT, TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) 3-38 Type: Analog Resistor+ This field is automatically filled in by the system. On screens 2-8, this will always read “ANALOG.” On screen number 1, it will read either “ANALOG” or “PULSE” depending on the position of the pulse switch on the satellite controller. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Resistor+ Screen Sensor Type Resistor to Ohms ratio: _______ / KOhm This is a choice field for Analog types only. A list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: This is the calibration for the scaling of the thermistor. There is a value that is needed for correct thermistor Resistance to Ohms calculations. <General, Thermistor, Resistor, Resistor+, RawCount, Thermistor+> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired Analog Type has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. Resistor+ is used to set up different types of thermistors. WattMaster thermistors are 10K type 3 curve. You would enter values on the screen to correspond to different values and type curves of thermistors. Available inputs are 0 to 9999 ohms, NOTE: The associated analog input jumper on the satellite controller must also be set to “THERM” in order for this screen to display the proper temperature value. Pattern for Values Associated With This Input: Specifies where you would like the decimal point to appear in the value displayed by the system. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: < x,xxx , xxx.x , xx.xx , x.xxx > You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. Resistor Bias: This is the Bias resistor in the satellite. This is currently a 10 K Ohm resistor and is soldered onto the satellite’s main circuit board. This Bias resistor can be changed but will need to be specified when the satellite is ordered from WattMaster Controls. Unit Offset: There is an option to change the calibration of a thermistor sensor (usually due to the position or location of the thermistor sensor) a few Ohms plus or minus from the actual Ohms that the thermistor sensor is actually reading. Acceptable values in this field are numerical with both positive and negative (+/-) values. WCC III Technical Guide Units of Measure Message #: 16 A number is entered here that references a message on the On/Off Units Messages Screen. For example, if units-of-measure message #16 is “Ohms,” entering “16” will cause “Ohms” to be displayed as the units-of-measure for the analog input. Filter Time Constant: ____ Seconds Specifies the sampling rate of the analog input. This is used by the satellites to “filter” (or smooth) the analog input signal. This can be used on inputs that “jump around” to reduce sporadic load control. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: < 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 > You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired filter time constant has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. ------ALARMS-----Controlled by: Specifies the binary value that selects the ON or OFF alarm limits. When this value is OFF, the OFF alarm limits are selected; when it is ON, the ON alarm limits are selected. Alarm Type: Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) Alarm Message # Low: ___ High: ___ Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for LOW alarms and the second for any HIGH alarms. These numbers are used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen. 3-39 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Resistor + Screen Alternate Limits Selected By: Specifies the point that initiates the Alternate mode. When this address is zero (or OFF), the Normal alarm limits are selected; when it is one (or ON), the Alternate alarm limits are selected. Limits On Off On (alt) Off (alt) Local Set Low _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ High _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F This group of inputs specifies the alarm limits for the “Normal,” “Alternate,” and “Local Set” modes. Each mode has a LOW and HIGH limit. When the value of the analog input goes out of these limits, an alarm is generated, and the alarm will automatically display and e-mail out. There are two fields on this screen that determine which set of limits are active—the status of the “Controlled by” field and the status of the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. When the value that has been input in the “Controlled by” field is ON, either the “On” limits or the “On (Alt)” limits are active depending on the status of the value input in the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. If the value in the “Alternate” field is On, the “On (Alt)” limits are used, and when the “Alternate” value is OFF, the “On” limits are used. Alternate Limits Active Alarm Controlled by: Selected by: Limits: On Off On On On On (Alt) Off Off Off Off On Off (Alt) The local set alarm limits become active if the MCD quits communicating with the satellite controller. After communications are re-established, any alarms that occurred while the satellite was in local set will be reported. Limit overlap time after control change: This specifies the amount of time the WCC software will wait after a control change (i.e., on/off schedule, alternate mode, local set mode) before deciding to generate an alarm. The first input is a user-entered number from 1 to 60, and the second input is either seconds or minutes. This second input is a “choice” field; the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Seconds, Minutes> 3-40 ------ BINARY SETPOINTS -----____Above:____ ____Below:____ These inputs are used to convert the analog signal to a binary (On/ Off) signal. The value that is going ON and OFF is a software point referred to as a comparator. Each analog input has a comparator associated with it named “Cn.” The comparator for analog input #1 is “C1,” analog input number 2 is “C2,” and so on. The status of the comparator can be seen on the Analog Input Summary Screen. When the user has selected: The value of the comparator is: OFF Above & OFF Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is equal to either one or between the two setpoints. OFF Above & ON Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is less than or equal to BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint. ON Above & OFF Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is less than or equal to the BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint. ON Above & ON Below: OFF when the Analog input value is equal to either one or between the two setpoints, and ON when the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ON, OFF> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice is selected and then pressing <Enter>. On Message #: Off Message #: Specifies a pair of message numbers, the first for the ON state and the second for the OFF state of the comparator. These numbers are used by the system to reference a message on the ON/OFF Units Message Screen. For example, the comparator might be set up to come on when the outside air temperature is below 55 °F for economizer operation. Set up the On/Off Message Screen so that message #3 is “ECON” and message #4 is “REFRIG.” The “On Message” number would be “3” (ECON), and the “OFF Message” number would be “4” (REFRIG). WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input RawCount Screen Analog Input Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXAY, where XXX = Satellite Address, A = Analog Input, and Y = 1-8 ANALOG INPUT RAWCOUNT SCREEN Satellite # _______ Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this field, type in the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. Additionally, this field specifies the point number to edit. For the Analog Input Screen, this number can range from one to eight, corresponding from A1 to A8, respectively. If you would like to edit a different point, move the cursor to this field by using the arrow keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>. Analog Input # ________ Description: This “field” actually contains two separate fields. The first field specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: A short message is entered here which is displayed on Summary Screens to help you remember points within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed). <ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT, TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) WCC III Technical Guide Type: RawCount This field is automatically filled in by the system. On screens 2-8, this will always read “ANALOG.” On screen number 1, it will read either “ANALOG” or “PULSE” depending on the position of the pulse switch on the satellite controller. 3-41 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input RawCount Screen ------ALARMS------ Sensor Type This is a choice field for Analog types only. A list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <General, Thermistor, Resistor, Resistor+, RawCount, Thermistor+> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired Analog Type has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. RawCount is the raw count value straight from the 12 bit A to D converter. Used for testing and or calibrating to see if the analog signal is linear, so that you may test the non-linear curve of any sensor to determine if any offset is needed. Units of Measure Message #: 1 A number is entered here that references a message on the On/Off Units Messages Screen. For example, if units-of-measure message #1 is “Data,” entering “1” will cause “Data” to be displayed as the units-of-measure for the analog input. Controlled by: Specifies the binary value that selects the ON or OFF alarm limits. When this value is OFF, the OFF alarm limits are selected; when it is ON, the ON alarm limits are selected. Alarm Type: Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) Alarm Message # Low: ___ High: ___ Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for LOW alarms and the second for any HIGH alarms. These numbers are used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen. Alternate Limits Selected By: Filter Time Constant: ____ Seconds Specifies the sampling rate of the analog input. This is used by the satellites to “filter” (or smooth) the analog input signal. This can be used on inputs that “jump around” to reduce sporadic load control. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: < 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 > You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired filter time constant has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. 3-42 Specifies the point that initiates the Alternate mode. When this address is zero (or OFF), the Normal alarm limits are selected; when it is one (or ON), the Alternate alarm limits are selected. Limits On Off On (alt) Off (alt) Local Set Low _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ High _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F This group of inputs specifies the alarm limits for the “Normal,” “Alternate,” and “Local Set” modes. Each mode has a LOW and HIGH limit. When the value of the analog input goes out of these limits, an alarm is generated, and the alarm will automatically display and e-mail out. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input RawCount Screen There are two fields on this screen that determine which set of limits are active—the status of the “Controlled by” field and the status of the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. When the value that has been input in the “Controlled by” field is ON, either the “On” limits or the “On (Alt)” limits are active depending on the status of the value input in the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. If the value in the “Alternate” field is On, the “On (Alt)” limits are used, and when the “Alternate” value is OFF, the “On” limits are used. Alternate Limits Active Alarm Controlled by: Selected by: Limits: On Off On On On On (Alt) Off Off Off Off On Off (Alt) The local set alarm limits become active if the MCD quits communicating with the satellite controller. After communications are re-established, any alarms that occurred while the satellite was in local set will be reported. ------ BINARY SETPOINTS -----____Above:____ ____Below:____ These inputs are used to convert the analog signal to a binary (On/ Off) signal. The value that is going ON and OFF is a software point referred to as a comparator. Each analog input has a comparator associated with it named “Cn.” The comparator for analog input #1 is “C1,” analog input number 2 is “C2,” and so on. The status of the comparator can be seen on the Analog Input Summary Screen. When the user has selected: OFF Above & OFF Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is equal to either one or between the two setpoints. OFF Above & ON Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is less than or equal to BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint. ON Above & OFF Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is less than or equal to the BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint. ON Above & ON Below: OFF when the Analog input value is equal to either one or between the two setpoints, and ON when the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint. Limit overlap time after control change: This specifies the amount of time the WCC software will wait after a control change (i.e., on/off schedule, alternate mode, local set mode) before deciding to generate an alarm. The first input is a user-entered number from 1 to 60, and the second input is either seconds or minutes. This second input is a “choice” field; the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: The value of the comparator is: <Seconds, Minutes> Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ON, OFF> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice is selected and then pressing <Enter>. On Message #: Off Message #: Specifies a pair of message numbers, the first for the ON state and the second for the OFF state of the comparator. These numbers are used by the system to reference a message on the ON/OFF Units Message Screen. For example, the comparator might be set up to come on when the outside air temperature is below 55 °F for economizer operation. Set up the On/Off Message Screen so that message #3 is “ECON” and message #4 is “REFRIG.” The “On Message” number would be “3” (ECON), and the “OFF Message” number would be “4” (REFRIG). WCC III Technical Guide 3-43 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Thermistor+ Screen Analog Input Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXAY, where XXX = Satellite Address, A = Analog Input, and Y = 1-8 ANALOG INPUT THERMISTOR+ SCREEN Satellite # 1 ANALOG INPUT # 2 Description: Room Type: Analog Thermistor+ Pattern for values associated with this input: xxx.x Degree Type: ºF Units of Measure message #: 1 Offset: 0.0 Deg F Filter time constant: 0 seconds b0: 0.0014062 b1: 0.00023671 b3: 0.0000001023 Controlled by: 0 Alarm Type: 1 Alarm Message #’s: __________________ ALARMS _____________________ Limits Low On 40.0 Low 1 High 2 Off 40.0 Alternate limits selected by: 0 Limit overlap time after control change: 0 Seconds High 60.0 60.0 Deg F Deg F On (alt) Off (alt) 40.0 40.0 60.0 60.0 Deg F Deg F Local set 40.0 60.0 Deg F ================= BINARY SETPOINT =================== OFF Above 8.0 Deg F On Message #: 5 Flow OFF Below 5.0 Deg F Off Message #: 6 No Flow HOME for menu Satellite # _______ Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this field, type in the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. Additionally, this field specifies the point number to edit. For the Analog Input Screen, this number can range from one to eight, corresponding from A1 to A8, respectively. If you would like to edit a different point, move the cursor to this field by using the arrow keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>. Analog Input # ________ Description: This “field” actually contains two separate fields. The first field specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: A short message is entered here which is displayed on Summary Screens to help you remember points within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed). <ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT, TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) 3-44 Type: Analog Thermistor+ This field is automatically filled in by the system. On screens 2-8, this will always read “ANALOG.” On screen number 1, it will read either “ANALOG” or “PULSE” depending on the position of the pulse switch on the satellite controller. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Thermistor+ Screen Sensor Type Offset: This is a choice field for Analog types only. A list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: There is an option to change the calibration of a thermistor sensor (Usually due to the position or location of the thermistor sensor) a few degrees plus or minus from the actual temperature that the thermistor sensor is actually reading. Acceptable values in this field are numerical with both positive and negative (+/-) values. <General, Thermistor, Resistor, Resistor+, RawCount, Thermistor+> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired Analog Type has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. Thermistor+ is to be used if you are using a thermistor type sensor that WattMaster Controls has not provided. Other thermistor type sensors can be connected to the Satellite controller’s analog inputs with this screen. Please consult the WattMaster Controls factory for all other thermistor type sensors that you wish to connect to the Satellite Controller. WattMaster Controls can provide the correct b0, b1, b3 values at our option. NOTE: The associated analog input jumper on the satellite controller must also be set to “THERM” in order for this screen to display the proper temperature value. Pattern for Values Associated With This Input: Units of Measure Message #: 1 A number is entered here that references a message on the On/Off Units Messages Screen. For example, if units-of-measure message #1 is “Deg F,” entering “1” will cause “Deg F” to be displayed as the units-of-measure for the analog input. Filter Time Constant: ____ Seconds Specifies the sampling rate of the analog input. This is used by the satellites to “filter” (or smooth) the analog input signal. This can be used on inputs that “jump around” to reduce sporadic load control. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: < 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 > You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired filter time constant has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. Specifies where you would like the decimal point to appear in the value displayed by the system. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: < x,xxx , xxx.x , xx.xx , x.xxx > ------ALARMS-----Controlled by: You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. Specifies the binary value that selects the ON or OFF alarm limits. When this value is OFF, the OFF alarm limits are selected; when it is ON, the ON alarm limits are selected. Degree Type: Alarm Type: Specifies how you would like the temperature displayed, in Fahrenheit or Celsius. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) < ºF, ºC > You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. WCC III Technical Guide Alarm Message # Low: ___ High: ___ Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for LOW alarms and the second for any HIGH alarms. These numbers are used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen. 3-45 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Thermistor+ Screen Alternate Limits Selected By: ------ BINARY SETPOINTS ------ Specifies the point that initiates the Alternate mode. When this address is zero (or OFF), the Normal alarm limits are selected; when it is one (or ON), the Alternate alarm limits are selected. ____Above:____ ____Below:____ Limits On Off On (alt) Off (alt) Local Set These inputs are used to convert the analog signal to a binary (On/ Off) signal. The value that is going ON and OFF is a software point referred to as a comparator. Each analog input has a comparator associated with it named “Cn.” The comparator for analog input #1 is “C1,” analog input number 2 is “C2,” and so on. The status of the comparator can be seen on the Analog Input Summary Screen. Low _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ High _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F _____ °. F This group of inputs specifies the alarm limits for the “Normal,” “Alternate,” and “Local Set” modes. Each mode has a LOW and HIGH limit. When the value of the analog input goes out of these limits, an alarm is generated, and the alarm will automatically display and e-mail out. There are two fields on this screen that determine which set of limits are active—the status of the “Controlled by” field and the status of the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. When the value that has been input in the “Controlled by” field is ON, either the “On” limits or the “On (Alt)” limits are active depending on the status of the value input in the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. If the value in the “Alternate” field is On, the “On (Alt)” limits are used, and when the “Alternate” value is OFF, the “On” limits are used. Alternate Limits Active Alarm Controlled by: Selected by: Limits: On Off On On On On (Alt) Off Off Off Off On Off (Alt) The local set alarm limits become active if the MCD quits communicating with the satellite controller. After communications are re-established, any alarms that occurred while the satellite was in local set will be reported. Limit overlap time after control change: This specifies the amount of time the WCC software will wait after a control change (i.e., on/off schedule, alternate mode, local set mode) before deciding to generate an alarm. The first input is a user-entered number from 1 to 60, and the second input is either seconds or minutes. This second input is a “choice” field; the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Seconds, Minutes> 3-46 When the user has selected: The value of the comparator is: OFF Above & OFF Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is equal to either one or between the two setpoints. OFF Above & ON Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is less than or equal to BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint. ON Above & OFF Below: OFF when the Analog Input value is less than or equal to the BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint. ON Above & ON Below: OFF when the Analog input value is equal to either one or between the two setpoints, and ON when the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ON, OFF> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice is selected and then pressing <Enter>. On Message #: Off Message #: Specifies a pair of message numbers, the first for the ON state and the second for the OFF state of the comparator. These numbers are used by the system to reference a message on the ON/OFF Units Message Screen. For example, the comparator might be set up to come on when the outside air temperature is below 55 °F for economizer operation. Set up the On/Off Message Screen so that message #3 is “ECON” and message #4 is “REFRIG.” The “On Message” number would be “3” (ECON), and the “OFF Message” number would be “4” (REFRIG). WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Thermistor+ Screen Thermistor+ Screen The Thermistor+ Screen is to be used if you are using a thermistor type sensor that WattMaster Controls has not provided. The example provided here is for a BAPI™ compatible Alerton™ standard 3K @ 77 Deg F Thermistor Sensor. Other thermistor type sensors can be connected to the Satellite controller’s analog inputs with this screen. Please consult the WattMaster Controls factory for all other thermistor type sensors that you wish to connect to the Satellite Controller. WattMaster Controls can provide the correct b0, b1, b3 values at our option. Also note that the associated analog input jumper on the Satellite controller must also be set to “THERM” in order for this screen to display the proper temperature value. A thermistor is a type of resistor whose resistance varies with temperature. Thermistor sensors differ from resistance temperature detectors (RTD) in that the material used in a thermistor sensor is generally a ceramic or polymer type of material, while RTD type sensors use pure metals. Advantages of Using a Thermistor Sensor The typical interchangeability tolerance (Inherent Accuracy) for any thermistor sensors are: ± 0.2 °C (0 to 70 °C) Disadvantages of Using a Thermistor Sensor The only real disadvantage to using a thermistor type sensor is that there are many different resistance types and corresponding different temperature curves for different manufacturers of thermistor temperature sensors. The temperature curve of a thermistor is non-linear in nature. To correctly calculate the temperature curve of a thermistor, WattMaster Controls uses a formula based on the industry standard Steinhart-Hart Equation. These formulas and resultant calculations reside within the Satellite controller as the Satellite controller’s CPU actually performs these resistance to temperature calculations many times per second. The Steinhart-Hart Equation The three-term Steinhart-Hart equation (Equation 1) is the most popular equation that is used for thermistor resistance to temperature calculations. There are three coefficients values that are needed for correct thermistor Resistance to Temperature sensor calculations: b0, b1, and b3. These three coefficients values should be provided by the thermistor manufacturer for each possible type of thermistor sensor that is used, but WattMaster Controls can also provide the correct b0, b1, b3 values at our option. Thermistor Stability (Drift) 1 Thermistor stability (drift) is the amount that the resistance characteristics of a thermistor will change. WattMaster Controls uses only the highest quality, “pre-aged” thermistor with very small drift values. Over a ten-year span, WattMaster Controls thermistor products will not change (drift) more than 0.1°C. T Operating ranges: = A + Bln (R) + C(ln(R))3 Where T is the temperature in Kelvins, R is the resistance at T in ohms, and A, B, and C are the Steinhart-Hart coefficients which vary depending on the type and model of thermistor and the temperature range of interest. The temperature in Kelvins is then converted to Fahrenheit or Celsius within the satellite controller. Typical maximum operating ranges for thermistor type sensors are -55 to 150 °C (-67 to 302 °F) WCC III Technical Guide 3-47 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Thermistor+ Screen Here are the three coefficients values for WattMaster Controls standard 10K @ 77 Deg F type 4 Thermistor Sensor. b0 = 0.001028340 (calculated as 0.0010283404 and rounded off to 0.001028340) b1 = 0.000239398 (calculated as 0.00023939782 and rounded off to 0.000239398) b3 = 0.0000001567 (calculated as 0.00000015669566 and rounded off to 0.0000001567) Here are the three coefficients values for the BAPI™ compatible Alerton™ standard 3K @ 77 Deg F Thermistor Sensor. Temperature / Resistance / Voltage Chart for the BAPI™ (Alerton™) Standard 3K @ 77 Deg F Thermistor Sensor Temp (ºF) Temp (ºC) Resistance (Ohms) Voltage @ Input (VDC) -39 -39.44 96,941 4.526 -37 -38.33 90,108 4.494 -35 -37.22 83,804 4.461 -33 -36.11 77,983 4.426 -31 -35.00 72,607 4.387 -29 -33.89 67,637 4.350 0.0014062 (calculated as 0.00140628 and rounded off to 0.0014062) -27 -32.78 63,041 4.308 -25 -31.67 58,789 4.267 b1 = 0.000236714 (calculated as 0.000236714 and rounded off to 0.00023671) -23 -30.56 54,851 4.222 -21 -29.44 51,173 4.176 b3 = 0.0000001023 (calculated as 0.000000102331 and rounded off to 0.0000001023) -19 -28.33 47,795 4.128 -17 -27.22 44,663 4.078 BAPI™ and Alerton™ are the trademarks of their respective companies. -15 -26.11 41,756 4.028 -13 -25.00 39,059 3.975 -11 -23.89 36,553 3.921 -9 -22.78 34,225 3.864 -7 -21.67 32,061 3.806 -5 -20.56 30,067 3.748 -3 -19.44 28,157 3.684 -1 -18.33 26,414 3.622 1 -17.22 24,790 3.557 3 -16.11 23,277 3.493 5 -15.00 21,865 3.427 7 -13.89 20,549 3.360 9 -12.78 19,320 3.293 11 -11.67 18,173 3.223 13 -10.56 17,101 3.154 15 -9.44 16,091 3.082 17 -8.33 15,155 3.012 19 -7.22 14,280 2.940 b0 = 3-48 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Thermistor+ Screen Temp (ºF) Temp (ºC) Resistance (Ohms) Voltage @ Input (VDC) Temp (ºF) Temp (ºC) Resistance (Ohms) Voltage @ Input (VDC) 21 -6.11 13,461 2.869 105 40.56 1,562 0.677 23 -5.00 12,694 2.797 107 41.67 1,494 0.652 25 -3.89 11,975 2.727 109 42.78 1,430 0.627 27 -2.78 11,302 2.655 111 43.89 1,368 0.603 29 -1.67 10,671 2.583 113 45.00 1,310 0.581 31 -0.56 10,079 2.512 115 46.11 1,255 0.559 33 0.56 9,519 2.135 117 47.22 1,202 0.538 35 1.67 8,999 2.365 119 48.33 1,151 0.518 37 2.78 8,510 2.296 121 49.44 1,104 0.499 39 3.89 8,050 2.227 123 50.56 1,058 0.480 41 5.00 7,619 2.160 125 51.67 1,104 0.482 43 6.11 7,213 2.093 127 52.78 973 0.444 45 7.22 6,831 2.027 129 53.89 933 0.427 47 8.33 6,472 1.962 131 55.00 895 0.411 49 9.44 6,134 1.898 133 56.11 860 0.397 51 10.56 5,813 1.837 135 57.22 825 0.382 53 11.67 5,513 1.775 137 58.33 793 0.368 55 12.78 5,231 1.716 139 59.44 761 0.354 57 13.89 4,965 1.657 141 60.56 731 0.341 59 15.00 4,714 1.600 143 61.67 703 0.329 61 16.11 4,478 1.544 145 62.78 676 0.317 63 17.22 4,254 1.490 147 63.89 650 0.306 65 18.33 4,043 1.437 149 65.00 625 0.295 67 19.44 3,844 1.388 151 66.11 601 0.284 69 20.56 3,655 1.338 153 67.22 578 0.274 71 21.67 3,477 1.289 155 68.33 556 0.264 73 22.78 3,309 1.243 157 69.44 536 0.255 75 23.89 3,150 1.197 159 70.56 516 0.246 77 25.00 3,000 1.153 161 71.67 496 0.237 79 26.11 2,858 1.110 163 72.78 478 0.229 81 27.22 2,723 1.069 165 73.89 461 0.221 83 28.33 2,596 1.029 167 75.00 444 0.213 85 29.44 2,475 0.991 169 76.11 428 0.206 87 30.56 2,360 0.953 171 77.22 413 0.199 89 31.67 2,252 0.918 173 78.33 398 0.192 91 32.78 2,149 0.883 175 79.44 384 0.186 93 33.89 2,051 0.849 177 80.56 370 0.179 95 35.00 1,959 0.821 179 81.67 357 0.173 97 36.11 1,871 0.790 181 82.78 345 0.167 99 37.22 1,788 0.760 183 83.89 333 0.162 101 38.33 1,709 0.731 185 85.00 321 0.156 103 39.44 1,634 0.704 187 86.11 310 0.151 WCC III Technical Guide 3-49 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Input Thermistor+ Screen Temperature Sensor Testing The following sensor voltage and resistance tables are provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly. Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring. Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual. If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly, check voltage and/or resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the tables. Please follow the notes and instructions below each chart when checking sensors. Temperature – Resistance – Voltage for Type III 10 K Ohm Thermistor Sensors 3-50 Temp (ºF) Resistance (Ohms) Voltage @ Input (VDC) -10 93333 4.620 -5 80531 4.550 0 69822 4.474 5 60552 4.390 10 52500 4.297 15 45902 4.200 20 40147 4.095 25 35165 3.982 30 30805 3.862 35 27140 3.737 40 23874 3.605 45 21094 3.470 50 18655 3.330 52 17799 3.275 54 16956 3.217 56 16164 3.160 58 15385 3.100 60 14681 3.042 62 14014 2.985 64 13382 2.927 66 12758 2.867 68 12191 2.810 69 11906 2.780 70 11652 2.752 71 11379 2.722 72 11136 2.695 73 10878 2.665 Temperature – Resistance – Voltage for Type III 10 K Ohm Thermistor Sensors Temp (ºF) Resistance (Ohms) Voltage @ Input (VDC) 74 10625 2.635 75 10398 2.607 76 10158 2.577 78 9711 2.520 80 9302 2.465 82 8893 2.407 84 8514 2.352 86 8153 2.297 88 7805 2.242 90 7472 2.187 95 6716 2.055 100 6047 1.927 105 5453 1.805 110 4923 1.687 115 4449 1.575 120 4030 1.469 125 3656 1.369 130 3317 1.274 135 3015 1.185 140 2743 1.101 145 2502 1.024 150 2288 0.952 Thermistor Sensor Testing Instructions Use the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controllers (not powered). Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers. Read voltage with meter set on DC volts. Place the “-” (minus) lead on GND terminal and the “+” (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated. If the voltage is above 5.08 VDC, then the sensor or wiring is “open.” If the voltage is less than 0.05 VDC, then the sensor or wiring is shorted. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Control Output Screens CONTROL OUTPUT SCREENS The Control Output Screens are used to “tell” the satellite controller when to open or close the binary output contacts. A binary output contact may be “programmed” using one of the following screens: 1) EA Driver 2) Dual Limit 3) Time Clock EA Driver Screen The EA Driver Screen is generally used to control the electric actuators on a variable air volume (VAV) box; however, it can be used for other applications. The EA Driver Screen uses two binary outputs on the satellite controller—the “COM to H” contact closes on a call for heating, and the “COM to C” contact closes on a call for cooling. The generic term for the method of control provided by the EA Driver Screen is “3 point floating control.” When the analog input signal is within the deadband, both contacts open and the actuator does not move. When the analog input signal falls below the setpoint into the pulse band, the “COM to H” output WCC III Technical Guide contact pulses at a preset rate to slowly move the actuator toward the required position. If the analog input signal falls below the pulse band, the “COM to H” contact closes and the actuator drives full speed. When the analog input signal rises above the setpoint, the same sequence occurs with the “COM to C” contact. Dual Limit Screen The Dual Limit Screen is used to “program” one binary output on the satellite controller to open and close based on how the value of an analog input compares to the setpoints. It is called dual limit because you have the option of entering two setpoints if required. For example, if you are using the SAT III to control a heat pump compressor, the binary output should close if the space temperature is below 72 °F for heating, close if the space temperature is above 76 °F for cooling, and be open when the space temperature is between 72 °F and 76 °F. Time Clock Screen The Time Clock Screen is used to open and close a binary output based on time only. For example, if you want the SAT III to run a pump from 8:00 am to 6:00 pm, Monday through Friday, a Time Clock Screen would be used to “program” the binary output for the pump. 3-51 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Control Output Summary Screen Control Output Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXKYh or c, where XXX = Satellite Address #, K = Control Output, Y = Control Output #, h = Heat (General Purpose), and c = Cool (General Purpose) CONTROL OUTPUT SUMMARY SCREEN Control Output COMMENTS Klh: c: K2h c: S1-K1h S1-K1c S1-K2h S1-K2c K3h: c: K4h: c: K5h: c: K6h: c: K7h: c: K8h: c: S1-K3h S1-K3c S1-K4h S1-K4c S1-K5h S1-K5c S1-K6h S1-K6c S1-K7h S1-K7c S1-K8h S1-K8c STATUS On On Off Off Off Satellite # __1 Satellite # __1 Control Outputs SCHED STATUS + + - 1 1 1L1 //// - //// //// //// //// //// //// 0 0 //// //// //// //// MODE ANALOG CONTROL INPUT 76.2 DEG. 74.7 DEG. Time 08:32 Date 1/20 CONTROL LOW LIMIT HIGH 74.0 set = 200.0 74.0 HOME for menu Control Out Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: To view or edit a specific control output, use the arrow keys to position the cursor (shown as “>” along the left hand side of the screen) to the desired point and press <Enter>. The Control Output Screen for the specific point will now appear. <Analog Input, Control Output, Analog Output, Trend Logging, Logic Switch, Binary Output> Time / Date You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired summary type appears and then pressing <Enter>. If you select a summary type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the new screen information. Satellite ______ The present time and date will automatically appear at these locations. COMMENTS The description message which was entered on the control output screen is displayed here to help you identify the different control outputs within the system. Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently communicating with. If you would like to view the control output summary data for a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this field, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. 3-52 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Control Output Summary Screen STATUS altl: A message is displayed here to help you monitor the status of the equipment being controlled. For items being controlled by the time clock or dual limit modes, the on/off messages which were input on the respective control output screens will automatically appear here. For the EA driver mode you will see one of the following symbols or messages: This message is to inform you that a control output using the time clock mode is in the primary alternate mode. When the status (“ON” or “OFF” state) of the [binary] input value which has been entered on the Control Output Screen to select the primary alternate mode is “ON,” the “altl” message will be displayed here. alt2: This message is to inform you that a control output using the time clock mode is in the secondary alternate mode. When the status (“ON” or “OFF” state) of the [binary] input value which has been entered on the Control Output Screen to select the secondary alternate mode is “ON,” the “alt2” message will be displayed here. loc: This message is to inform you that the control outputs are in the local set mode. This message will appear if the small toggle switch on the front of the satellite controller labeled “local set” is in the on position. This message will also appear when the satellite is going through a power up delay. The power up delay allows the WCC III system to soft-start the equipment after a power failure. When power is restored to a satellite, the output contacts will remain open for an adjustable amount of time. The delay time is entered for each satellite controller on the satellite summary screen. idle: When this message appears, the value of the analog input associated with the control output is within the setpoint deadband. In the idle mode, both the “h” and “c” contacts are open and the controlled device remains in its present position. ->C When this symbol appears, the value of the analog input associated with the control output is above the deadband but within the pulse band. The “c” contact is pulsing at the programmed time intervals. -->C When this symbol appears, the value of the analog input associated with the control output is above the pulse band. The “c” contact is closed, and the controlled device is moving full speed toward the cooling position. ->H When this symbol appears, the value of the analog input associated with the control output is below the deadband but within the pulse band. The “h” contact is pulsing at the programmed time intervals. -->H When this symbol appears, the value of the analog input associated with the control output is below the pulse band. The “h” contact is closed, and the controlled device is moving full speed toward the heating position. Schedule Status CAUTION: Note that the contact outputs in the satellite controller will remain open during the power up delay time. This should be taken into consideration when you are deciding whether an open contact in the satellite should cause the equipment to be ON or OFF. revr: This message appears when the control output is in the reverse acting mode (EA Driver Screen only.) ovr: When using the Dual Limit Screen, this message will appear when the output has been overridden from the Override Screen. The binary input which is controlling the schedule of the control output is shown here along with a plus (+) or minus (-) sign. The plus and minus signs indicate the present status (“ON” or “OFF” state) of the input value which is controlling the schedule. For example, if week schedule W1 has been input to control the schedule on an EA Driver Screen, the message “+ W1” will appear here when week schedule #1 is “ON,” and “- W1” will appear when week schedule #1 is “OFF.” The value of the analog input associated with the EA Driver and Dual Limit Screens will automatically be displayed here. Mode The setpoints entered on the EA Driver and Dual Limit Screens will automatically be displayed here. Analog Control Input CONTROL LIMIT LOW HIGH One of the following messages may be displayed here: alt: This message is to inform you that the setpoints for the EA Driver or Dual Limit Screens are in the alternate mode. When the status (“ON” or “OFF” state) of the [binary] input value which has been entered on the Control Output Screen to select the alternate setpoints is “ON,” the “alt” message will be displayed here. WCC III Technical Guide 3-53 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Control Output EA Driver Screen Control Output Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXKYh or c, where XXX = Satellite Address #, K = Control Output, Y = Control Output #, h = Heat (General Purpose), and c = Cool (General Purpose) EA DRIVER SCREEN Satellite #:_____ Satellite # 1 CONTROL OUTPUT Description: S1-K2h Analog Control by: //// Schedule Control by: L1 2 Mode: EA Driver COM to H on decreasing control signal COM to C on increasing control signal Setpoints On Schedule: Off Schedule: Local Set: Dead Pulse “ “ 0 DEG. 1 DEG. 0 DEG. Alternate On: Off: Selected by: Band width: +/- 0 DEG. Band width: +/- 0 DEG. “ Off Time: 0 Minutes “ On Time: 3 Minutes Reverse Action Selc’d When 0 Deg F. 0 Deg F //// //// is OFF ACTION DIAGRAM < ON COM-H > PULSED < ALL OFF > < COM-C PULSED > ON Setpoint Dead Band Pulse Band width HOME for menu Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this field, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. 1 to 240. Control Output _____ This “field” actually contains two separate fields. The first field specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT, TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired point type has been selected. If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data. The second field specifies the point number to edit. For the Control Output Screen, this number can range from one to eight. If you would like to edit a different point, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this field, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>. Mode: __________ Specifies the mode type of the output contact. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Undefined, EA Driver, Time Clock, Dual Limit> 3-54 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Control Output EA Driver Screen You make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired point type appears and then pressing <Enter>. If you select a mode type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen information. Schedule Control by: On On Off Off Description: ____________ A short message entered here will appear on summary screens to help you remember points within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed). Analog Control by: Specifies the analog point address that acts as the input signal source for this control output. Analog points within the satellite are named A1-A8. Global analog values are GA1-GA256. (See Table of Point Addresses in the General Instructions section on page 1-8 for more information.) Schedule Control by: ____________ Specifies the binary (On/Off) point address used to schedule this control output. When this address is zero (or OFF), the OFF schedule mode is selected; when it is one (or ON), the ON schedule mode is selected. COM to H on decreasing control signal COM to C on increasing control signal Displayed by the system as a reminder of the function of the output contacts in the EA Driver mode. The EA Driver mode uses two of the SAT III binary output contacts. The COM to H contact closes when the value of the analog input is less than the setpoint. The COM to C contact closes when the value of the analog input is greater than the setpoint. ----------- Setpoints ---------On Schedule: ______ Alternate On: ______ Off Schedule: ______ Off: ______ Local Set: _______ Selected by: ______ Specifies a set of analog setpoints (5 total) for the ON and OFF normal mode schedule, ON and OFF alternate mode schedule, and Local Set. The value of the input in the Schedule Control by field and the Alternate Limits Selected by field determine which setpoint will be used as shown as follows: Alternate Limits Selected by: Off On Off On Setpoint: On Schedule Alternate On Off Schedule Alternate Off Dead Band Width (+/-): _______ Pulse Band Width (+/-):_______ Specifies the width (plus or minus the setpoint) of the Dead and Pulse bands. When the system is within the Pulse band, the EA driver is pulsed, using the timing given below. When the system is within the Dead band, both contacts open and the controlled device will remain in its present position. “ “ “ “ Off Time: ____ Seconds or Minutes On Time: ____ Seconds or Minutes Specifies the length of time for the ON and OFF states of the contact in the Pulse mode. The range is 0 to 60 seconds or minutes, depending on the unit of time selected. These inputs also act as a minimum On/Off time for the COM to H and COM to C contacts. That is, if 10 seconds is entered as the Pulse ON and Pulse OFF times, once either contact opens it will remain open for a minimum of 10 seconds, and once a contact closes it will remain closed for a minimum of 10 seconds. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: < Seconds, Minutes > You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice, and when the desired unit of time appears, press <Enter>. Reverse Action Selected When _______is _______ Specifies the binary point address along with the value that the point address must have to select reverse action mode. When the reverse action mode is enabled, the opposite contact closes. Normally, the COM to C contact closes when the value of the analog input is above the setpoint, but while the reverse action mode is in effect, the COM to H contact closes and vice versa. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <OFF, ON> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice, and when the desired state has been selected, press <Enter>.: WCC III Technical Guide 3-55 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Control Output Dual Limit Screen Control Output Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXKYh or c, where XXX = Satellite Address #, K = Control Output, Y = Control Output #, h = Heat (General Purpose), and c = Cool (General Purpose) DUAL LIMIT SCREEN Satellite # 1 CONTROL OUTPUT 1 Mode: Dual Limit “H” Contact Description: S1-K1h Analog Control by: //// Schedule Control by: 1 Alternate Mode selected by: //// Override OPEN when 0B2 is OFF Local Set: On Schedule: Off Schedule: On Schedule: (alt) Off Schedule:(alt) OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN Contact Open Message Contact Closed Minimum Off Time: 0 Minimum On Time: 0 Hysteresis: +/- 0 Between Between Between Between Between Low Limit 0 0 0 0 0 & & & & & #: 2 Off Message #: Seconds Seconds x 1 DEG. 1 On Hi Limit 0 DEG. 0 DEG. 0 DEG. 0 DEG. 0 DEG. Data Register is measured from Midpoint and Reflects Hysteresis HOME for menu Satellite #: _____ Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this field, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. Control Output _____ This field actually contains two separate fields. The first field specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT, TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice, until the desired point type has been selected. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) The second field specifies the point number to edit. For the Control Output Screen, this number can range from one to eight. If you would like to edit a different point, simply position 3-56 the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>. Mode: ____________ Specifies the mode type of the output contact. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Undefined, EA Driver, Time Clock, Dual Limit> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice, until the desired point type has been selected, and then pressing <Enter>. (If you select a mode type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen information.) _______ Contact Specifies which of the two available contacts per point (H or C) to configure. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <H,C> WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Control Output Dual Limit Screen You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected and then pressing <Enter>. Note that the H and C contact designations do not mean that they must be used to control heating or cooling loads respectively. They are independent contacts. Description: ______________ is _____ Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <OFF, ON> To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired override state has been selected, and then press <Enter>. A short message is entered here which is displayed on Summary and Data Entry/Editing Screens to help you to remember points within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed). The override is enabled when this statement is true. For example, if you enter “Override Open When GB1 is ON,” the satellite contact will be forced open when global binary #1 goes ON. Analog Control by: _______________ Contact Open Message #: ____ Contact Closed Message #: ____ Specifies the analog point address that acts as the input signal source for this control output. Schedule Control by: _________________ Specifies the binary point address used to schedule this control output. When this address is OFF, the OFF schedule setpoints are used; when it is ON, the ON schedule setpoints are used. Alternate Mode Selected by: _________________ Specifies the binary point address that initiates the Alternate mode. When this address is zero (or OFF), the Normal mode is selected; when it is one (or ON), the Alternate mode is selected. Override __________ when _________ is __________ This field is used to override the satellite contact either open or closed based on a binary value going ON or OFF. This has priority over everything except the minimum on and off times. Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for the contact open state and the second for the contact closed state. These numbers refer to a message on the On/Off Message Screen. For example, message #1 might be “Fan On” and message #2 “Fan Off.” If you want the message on the Control Output Summary Screen to be “Fan On” when the satellite contact is closed, enter “#1” as the contact closed message etc. Minimum Off Time: ____ seconds Minimum On Time: ____ seconds Specifies the minimum ON and OFF times for switching a load to its opposite state (i.e., ON to OFF or OFF to ON). That is, once the satellite contact closes it will remain closed for the minimum ON time, and once it opens it will remain open for the minimum OFF time. The range is 0 to 60 seconds or minutes, depending on the unit of time selected. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Seconds, Minutes> Override ______ Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: < CLOSED, OPEN > Closed means that the satellite contact will be forced closed when the override statement is true. Open means the satellite contact will be forced open. To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired override state has been selected, and then press <Enter>. When _____ This is where you enter a binary value. WCC III Technical Guide To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each choice, and when the desired unit of time appears, press <Enter>. Note that the minimum ON and OFF time has precedence over demand limiting, overrides, etc. Hysteresis: = _____ x 0.1 Hysteresis is a software entry that allows an operator to specify how much a measure variable, such as room temperature, has to change before the switch changes state. For example, consider a temperature setpoint of 72 °F with a +/-0.5 °F hysteresis. The switch will change state (open/close) when the temperature rises to 72.5 °F and will not switch back to its original state until the temperature drops to 71.5 °F. 3-57 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Control Output Dual Limit Screen The multiplier is automatically selected based on the data pattern for the analog input associated with this screen. If the data pattern is xxx.x, then 0.1 will appear as the multiplier. If a +/-0.5 hysteresis is desired, input 5, and the system will multiply 5 by 0.1 to equal 0.5. Low Limit High Limit Local Set _______ Between_______ & _______ On Schedule _______ Between_______ & _______ Off Schedule _______ Between_______ & _______ On Schedule (Alt)____ Between_______ & _______ Off Schedule (Alt)_____Between_______ & _______ This group of inputs specifies the setpoints for the “Local Set,” “Normal,” and “Alternate” modes. The “Local Set” setpoints are selected whenever the front end computer quits communicating with the satellite controller. The value of the input in the Schedule Control by field and the Alternate Mode Selected by field determine which setpoints will be used as shown below: Schedule Control by: On On Off Off Alternate Mode Selected by: Off On Off On Setpoint On Schedule On Schedule (Alt) Off Schedule Off Schedule (Alt) In the first field you specify whether you want the satellite contact to “Open” or “Close” when the value of the analog input is between the limits. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <CLOSED, OPEN> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired contact state appears and then pressing <Enter>. Data register is measured from ______ and ______ Hysteresis. For the phrase: “Data register is measured from ...” <Midpoint, Nearest Limit> and for the phrase: “and __________ Hysteresis.” <Ignores, Reflects> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired definition appears and then pressing <Enter>. If “Midpoint” is selected, the value of the data register will be the difference between the actual value of the analog input associated with this screen, such as room temperature, and the midpoint between the two setpoints. If “Nearest Limit” is selected, the value of the data register will be the difference between the actual value of the analog input associated with this screen, such as room temperature, and the nearest setpoint. See the Data Register write-up in the General Instructions section of this guide on page 1-9 for more information. Logical Off is “ . . . . . “ This means that this value is Off and has no schedule control. This value can be overridden on the Override Schedules Screen. Same as “0”. Null Value is “ / / / / “ This means that this value is neither On nor Off, but can also be On or Off in certain circumstances. It is best not to leave the Null Values in place. This value CANNOT be overridden on the Override Schedules Screen. This value can also mean negative infinity. If you have an application where you want the low limit to be negative infinity, input the slash (/) for the low limit value. The system will show a series of minus signs as the (-----) setpoint. In the same manner, if you want the high limit to be positive infinity, input the slash (/) as the high limit value. The system will show a series of plus signs (+++++) as the input value. 3-58 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Control Output Time Clock Screen Control Output Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXKYh or c, where XXX = Satellite Address #, K = Control Output, Y = Control Output #, h = Heat (General Purpose), and c = Cool (General Purpose) TIME CLOCK SCREEN Satellite # 1 CONTROL OUTPUT #__1 Mode: Time Clock “H” Contact Description: S1-K1h Contact is: CLOSED OPEN OPEN OPEN Contact Contact Minimum Minimum in in in in Open Message #: Closed Message #: Off Time: 0 Seconds On Time: 0 Seconds “On” Schedule Primary Alternate Mode Secondary Alternate Mode Local Set 2 Lght Off 1 Lght On Selected by: 1 Selected by: //// Selected by: //// HOME for menu Satellite #: ____ Mode: ______________ Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, simply position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. Specifies the mode type of the currently specified contact. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Control Output ____ This field actually contains two separate fields. The first field specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT, TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice, until the desired point type has been selected. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) The second field specifies the point number to edit. For the Control Output Screen, this number can range from one to eight. If you would like to edit a different point, simply position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>. WCC III Technical Guide <Undefined, EA Driver, Time Clock, Dual Limit> To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (If you select a mode type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen information.) ______ Contact Specifies which of the two available contacts per point (H or C) to configure. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: < H,C > Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Note that the H and C contact designations do not mean that the contacts must be used to control heating or cooling loads, respectively. They are independent contacts. 3-59 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Control Output Time Clock Screen Description: _____________ A short message is entered here which will be displayed on Summary and Data Entry/Editing Screens to aid you in remembering points within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed). Contact Open Message #: ____ Contact Closed Message #: ____ Specifies a pair of message numbers, the first for the contact open state and the second for the contact closed state. These numbers refer to a message on the On/Off Message Screen. For example, message #1 might be “Fan On” and message #2 “Fan Off.” If you want the message on the Control Output Summary Screen to be “Fan On” when the satellite contact is closed, enter “#1” as the contact closed message etc. Minimum Off Time: Minimum On Time: _____ seconds _____ seconds Specifies the minimum ON and OFF times for switching a load to its opposite state (i.e., ON to OFF or OFF to ON). That is, once the satellite contact closes it will remain closed for the minimum ON time, and once it opens it will remain open for the minimum OFF time. The range is 0 to 60 seconds or minutes, depending on the unit of time selected. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Seconds, Minutes> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice, and when the desired unit of time appears, press the <Enter> key. Contact is: _________in “On” Schedule Selected by:________ _________in Primary Alt Mode Selected by:________ _________in Secondary Alt Mode Selected by:________ _________in Local Set Selected by:________ The first field specifies whether the satellite contact is to Open or Close when the binary value entered in its Selected by field goes On. The Primary Alt mode has highest priority, followed by Secondary Alternate, and then On Schedule. Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <OPEN, CLOSED> On the “On” schedule < OPEN, CLOSED, HOLD LAST > On the Primary Alt Mode, Secondary Alt Mode, and Local Set Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Note that the HOLD LAST is available for Primary Alt, Secondary Alt and Local Set modes only. If HOLD LAST is selected in the Local Set mode, the contact will stay closed if it was closed at the time the satellite went into local set or will stay open if it was open when the satellite went into local set. Note that the minimum ON and OFF time has precedence over demand limiting, overrides, etc. 3-60 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Control Output Time Clock Screen WCC III Technical Guide 3-61 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Control Output Time Clock Screen 3-62 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Output Summary Screen Analog Output Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXPY, where XXX = Satellite Address #, P = Analog Output, Y = Analog Output # ANALOG OUTPUT SUMMARY SCREEN Analog Output Satellite # 1 Sat. #1 Time 08:53 Date 1/20 Analog Outputs COMMENTS P1: P2: P3: P4: P5: P6: P7: P8: P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 STATUS MODE CURRENT INPUT INPUT RANGE OUTPUT RANGE 10.0 V 10.0 V 10.7 V V V 5.0 V 5.0 V 5.0 V alt alt alt alt alt alt alt alt 99.0 Deg F 99.0 Deg F 99.0 Deg F 20.0 20.0 20.0 - 80.0 80.0 80.0 5.0 - 10.0 V 5.0 - 10.0 V 5.0 - 10.0 V 9.0 Deg F 9.0 Deg F 9.0 Deg F 20.0 20.0 40.0 - 80.0 80.0 80.0 5.0 - 10.0 V 5.0 - 10.0 V 5.0 - 10.0 V HOME for menu An analog output is a proportional DC voltage supplied by the SAT III with a maximum range of 0-15 VDC. The analog outputs are proportional only, not proportional plus integral (PI), or proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID). To view or edit a specific analog output, use the arrow keys to move the cursor (shown as “>” along the left hand side of the screen) to the desired point, and press <Enter>. The Analog Output Screen for the specified point will appear. Analog Out Time / Date Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen. The current time and date will automatically be displayed here. <Analog Input, Control Output, Analog Output, Trend Logging, Logic Switch, Binary Output> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired summary type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. If you select a summary type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the new information. COMMENTS The description message which is entered on the individual Analog Output Screens will automatically appear here to help you identify the different analog outputs within the system. STATUS The amount of DC voltage supplied by the analog output is shown here to help you monitor the status of the analog output. Satellite ______ Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently communicating with. If you would like to view the analog output summary data for a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this field, enter the desired number, and press <Enter>. WCC III Technical Guide 3-63 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Output Summary Screen MODE INPUT RANGE An “alt” message may be displayed in this column to inform you that analog output is in its alternate mode. When the status of the binary input which has been entered on the analog output screen to select the alternate mode is “ON,” the alternate control limits are used, and the “alt” message is shown here. You specify an output voltage for a given analog input signal on the Analog Output Screen. The values which are input on the analog output screen are shown here. For example, if you input the following ranges on the Analog Output Screen: CURRENT INPUT The value of the analog input associated with the Analog Output Screen is automatically displayed here. For example, if you are controlling a chilled water valve based on supply air temperature, the supply air temperature will be shown here. 3-64 OUTPUT RANGE Output = 0.0 volts when input is 50.0 °F Output = 15.0 volts when input is 60.0 °F The Summary Screen would look like this: INPUT RANGE OUTPUT RANGE 50.0 - 60.0 0.0 - 15.0 V WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Output Screen Analog Output Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXPY, where XXX = Satellite Address #, P = Analog Output, Y = Analog Output # ANALOG OUTPUT SCREEN Satellite # 1 Description: ANALOG OUTPUT # P1 Filter time constant: 0 seconds Controlled by input: A1 Output Output 2 = 5.0 volts when input is = 10.0 volts when input is 20.0 Deg F 80.0 Deg F Alternate Mode selected by: Selected by: Output Output .... = 0.0 volts when input is = 0.0 volts when input is 0.0 Deg F 0.0 Deg F When calculated output below 5.0 volts, set output to 5.0 volts When calculated output above 10.0 volts, set output to 10.0 volts HOME for menu Satellite # _____ Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, move the cursor to this field using arrow keys, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. 1 to 239. Analog Output #_____ This field actually contains two separate fields. The first field specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT, TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) This second field specifies the point number to edit. For the Analog Output Screen, this number can range from one to eight, corresponding from P1 to P8, respectively. If you would like to edit a different point, simply position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>. Description This is displayed on Summary and Data Entry/Editing Screens to aid you in remembering points within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed). Filter Time Constant: _____ seconds Specifies the reaction rate of the analog output. This is generally used to slow down the rate at which the analog output changes voltage to reduce “hunting.” Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: < 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 > WCC III Technical Guide 3-65 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Output Screen To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired filter time constant has been selected, and then press <Enter>. For example, if Output = 0.0 volts when input is 72 °F Output = 15.0 volts when input is 76 °F Controlled by input: Specifies the [analog] point address that acts as the input signal source for the control range specified. The output voltage is proportional to the value of this input. Output = ___._ volts when input is _____ Output = ___._ volts when input is _____ Specifies the output voltage range for a given analog input signal. The maximum output range is 0 to 15 volts D.C., and may be specified in such a way as to allow a proportional (direct acting) or an inversely proportional (reverse acting) output voltage. (Alternate and normal modes each have an output voltage range specification.) is used, the output will range from 0 to 15 volts when the input signal is from 72 °F to 76 °F. If the input signal is less than 72 °F or greater than 76 °F, the output will be 0 and 15 volts, respectively. Selected by: Specifies the [binary] point address that initiates the Alternate mode. When this address is zero (or OFF), the Normal output range is selected; when it is one (or ON), the Alternate output range is selected. When calculated output below xx.x volts, set output to xx.x volts When calculated output above xx.x volts, set output to xx.x volts This field allows you to enter a defined range for output voltage. When the calculated output falls below a determined voltage, set the output to a defined voltage. When the calculated output goes past a determined voltage, set the output to a defined voltage. 3-66 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Output Screen WCC III Technical Guide 3-67 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS WCC III System Logging WCC III SYSTEM LOGGING SAT TREND LOGGING Additional WCC III system long-term trend logging is available with the WCC3Trendlog.exe program. Any of the following point addresses can be trend logged: The WCC III system SAT III Controller has four trend modes described below. A SAT cannot trendlog another SAT Analog or Binary Control Point. The Satellite Controller can only trendlog its own inputs and output. Week Schedules, Global Binary, Global Analog, and Optimal Starts can be trendlogged on any Satellite Controller. Satellite Binary Inputs Satellite Analog Inputs Satellite Analog Outputs SAT Change of State Satellite Binary Outputs A trend logging mode which records any changes of state (i.e. “OFF” going to “ON” or “ON” going to “OFF”) of a binary value along with the time and date of the change. Acceptable values are 0, 1, GBXXX, KXh, KXc, WXX, SX, OXX, LXX, CX. Satellite Control Outputs H Contact Satellite Control Outputs C Contact Satellite Data Register A SAT Run Time Total Satellite Data Register B A trend logging feature which allows the WCC III to accumulate the amount of time a binary value has been “ON” or “OFF.” Acceptable values are 0, 1, GBXXX, KXh, KXc, WXX, SX, OXX, LXX, CX. Satellite Run Times Satellite Logic Switch WCC Global Analog SAT Analog Trend WCC Global Binary A trend logging mode which records the value of a measured variable, such as room temperature, at programmed time intervals. Acceptable values are AX, PX, GAXXX, RXA, RXB. WCC Week Schedule WCC Optimal Start The WCC3 Trendlog.exe program allows that any of these points can be charted and graphed and saved. There is an additional option to save this data file as an ODBC database type file structure for viewing in MS Access, Excel, or any other third party database program that uses ODBC formatting. 3-68 SAT Analog Peak A trend logging mode which records the highest and lowest value of a measured variable along with the time and the date that the peak occurred. Acceptable values are AX, PX, GAXXX, RXA, RXB. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS SAT Trend Log Summary Screen Satellite Trend Log Summary Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXTYc, where XXX = Satellite Address #, T = Trend Log, Y = Point Number, c = Change of State SAT TREND LOG SUMMARY SCREEN Trend Logging Point T1c: T2c: T3c: T4c: T5c: T6c: T7c: T8c: Point T1a: T2a: T3a: T4a: T5a: T6a: T7a: T8a: Satellite # CHANGE OF STATE Description Last change S1-K1h 16:23 12/09 S1-K2h 8:33 12/10 S1-K3h 16:23 12/09 S1-K4h 16:23 12/09 S1-K5h 16:23 12/09 S1-K6h 08:59 01/12 S1-K7h 16:23 12/09 S1-K8h 16:23 12/09 ANALOG TREND Description S1-A1 S1-A2 S1-A3 S1-A4 S1-A5 S1-A6 S1-A7 S1-A8 1 Sat.#1 Point T1r: T2r: T3r: T4r: T5r: T6r: T7r: T8r: Last Sample 50.0 Deg F 0 Deg. F 0 Deg. F 0 Deg. F 0 Deg. F 0 Deg. F 9.0 Deg. F 99.0 Deg. F Point T1p: T2p: T3p: T4p: T5p: T6p: T7p: T8p: Time 09:08 RUN TIME TOTAL Description Current Val S1-K1h 1870 Hours S1-K2h 868 Hours S1-K3h 1870 Hours S1-K4h 1870 Hours S1-K5h 1870 Hours S1-K6h 1678 Hours S1-K7h 1870 Hours S1-K8h 1870 Hours Date 01/20 Alarm Limit 5000 Hours 5000 Hours 5000 Hours 5000 Hours 5000 Hours 5000 Hours 5000 Hours 5000 Hours ANALOG PEAK Description Low High S1-A1 0.0 50.0 S1-A2 0.0 0.0 S1-A3 0.0 0.0 S1-A4 0.0 0.0 S1-A5 0.0 0.0 S1-A6 0.0 0.0 S1-A7 0.0 9.0 S1-A8 0.0 99.0 Units Deg. F Deg. F Deg. F Deg. F Deg. F Deg. F Deg. F Deg. F SAT Trend Log Time / Date Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: The present time and date will automatically appear at these locations. <Analog Input, Control Output, Analog Output, Trend Logging, Logic Switch, Binary Output> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired summary type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (If you select a summary type that is different than that being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate information.) Satellite ______ Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently communicating with. If you would like to view the trend log summary data for a different satellite, simply position the cursor to this field using the arrow keys, enter the desired number, and press <Enter>. To view or edit a specific trend log, simply position the cursor (shown as “>“) using the arrow keys to the desired point, and press <Enter>. The Trend Log Screen for the desired point will appear. WCC III Technical Guide Point The system automatically displays the “name” of each of the trend log points. T = Trend Log 1 - 8 = The number of the trend log c = Change of State r = Run Time a = Analog Trend p = Analog Peak Description The message which is entered on the specific Trend Logging Screen is automatically displayed here to help you identify the different trend logs within the system. Each of the trend log modes have a heading such a “Last Change,” “Current Value,” etc. The most recent value of the individual trend logs will automatically be displayed here. 3-69 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS SAT Change of State Trend Log Screen Satellite Trend Log Summary Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXTYc, where XXX = Satellite Address #, T = Trend Log, Y = Point Number, c = Change of State SAT CHANGE OF STATE TREND LOG SCREEN Satellite # 1 TREND LOGGING # 1 Records time & date of state changes on: K1h Off On Off On Off ----------- 0. 1. 2. 3. 4. 10:01 10:04 00:00 10:55 00:00 S1-K1h of Type: CHANGE OF STATE Starting at: *:* on */* Reset by: //// being ON Roll after 48 readings 12/01 12/01 00/00 12/09 00/00 Satellite #: _____ Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, simply position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (When you select a trend logging mode that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) Trend Log #: ____ Record time & date of state change on: ________ This field actually contains two separate fields. The first field specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Specifies the [binary] point address for which the change-of-states are to be recorded. <ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT, TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) The second field specifies the point number to edit. For the Trend Log Screen, this number can range from one to eight. If you would like to edit a different point, simply position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>. Starting at: 00:00 on 00/00 Specifies the time and date that the trend log recording should begin. (The time is represented in 24-hour format.) The system considers *’s in these positions to be “wild cards.” Therefore, if you want the system to always log the changes-of-state peaks independent of the time and date, enter “*:* on */*.” Reset by _________ being _____. Specifies the [binary] point address that will be used to reset (or clear) the record trend log data. The first field specifies the point address, and the second specifies the state or condition that the point address needs to be in to clear the data. Because this second field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <OFF, ON> of Type _________ after 48 readings Specifies which of the four available trend logging modes (analog peak, analog trend, change-of-state, and run time) you wish to use. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Specifies whether the data logging process will stop after 48 readings have been taken or will continue (roll over). Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ANALOG TREND, ANALOG PEAK, CHANGE OF STATE, RUN TIME> <Stop, Roll> 3-70 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS SAT Run Time Trend Log Screen Satellite Trend Log Summary Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXTYr, where XXX = Satellite Address #, T = Trend Log, Y = Point Number, r = Run Time SAT RUN TIME TREND LOG SCREEN Satellite # 1 TREND LOGGING # 1 of Type: RUN TIME Records total ON time for Klh S1-Kh Starting at : *:* on */* Reset by: //// being ON Current run time: 1871 Hours Alarm Type: 0 Alarm Message #: 0 Alarm Limit: 9999 Hours HOME for menu Satellite #: _____ of Type Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, simply position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. Specifies which of the four available trend logging modes (analog peak, analog trend, change-of-state, and run time) you wish to use. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Trend Log #: ____ This field actually contains two separate fields. The first field specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT, TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected and then press <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) The second field specifies the point number to edit. For the Trend Log Screen, this number can range from one to eight. If you would like to edit a different point, simply position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>. WCC III Technical Guide <ANALOG TREND, ANALOG PEAK, CHANGE OF STATE, RUN TIME> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (When you select a trend logging mode that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) Records total ____ time for: ______ Specifies the state (ON or OFF) and the [binary] point address for which the run time is to be recorded. Because the state field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <OFF, ON> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired state has been selected, and then press <Enter>. 3-71 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS SAT Run Time Trend Log Screen Current run time: _____ seconds Reset by _______ being ____. This is the current accumulated run time. You may select the units of time by positioning the cursor after the current run time. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Specifies the [binary] point address that will be used to reset (or clear) the record trend log data. The first field specifies the point address, and the second specifies the state or condition that the point address needs to be in to clear the data. Because this second field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Hours, Seconds, Minutes> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired state has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Starting at: 00:00 on 00/00 Specifies the time and date that the trend log recording should begin. (The time is represented in 24-hour format.) The system considers *’s in these positions to be “wild cards.” Therefore, if you want the system to log the run time independent of the time and date, enter “*:* on */*.” <OFF, ON> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired state has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Alarm Type: _____ Specifies the priority (or “importance level”) for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (high priority) to eight (low priority). The system responds to higher priority alarms first. Alarm Message #: _____ Specifies a message number for the run time alarm condition. This number is used by the system to reference a textual message which is displayed on the Alarm Summary Screen. Alarm Limit: ____ seconds Specifies a time limit at which point an alarm will be activated. That is, when the total run time exceeds this limit, an alarm indication will be sent from the satellite. The units of time will be the same as that selected for the current run time. 3-72 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS SAT Analog Trend Trend Log Screen Satellite Trend Log Summary Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXTYa, where XXX = Satellite Address #, T = Trend Log, Y = Point Number, a = Analog Trend SAT ANALOG TREND TREND LOG SCREEN Satellite # 1 TREND LOGGING # Records value of: A1 S1-A1 once every: 15 Minutes 21:53 22:08 22:23 22:38 22:53 23:08 23:23 23:38 23:53 00:08 00:23 00:38 00:53 01:08 01:23 01:38 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 1 of Type: ANALOG TREND Starting at: *:* on */* Reset by: .... being ON Roll after 48 readings 01:53 02:08 02:23 02:38 02:53 03:08 03:23 03:38 03:53 04:08 04:23 04:38 04:53 05:08 05:23 05:38 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 06:08 06:23 06:38 06:53 07:08 07:23 07:38 07:53 08:08 08:23 08:38 08:53 09:08 09:23 09:38 09:53 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/20 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 HOME for menu Satellite #: ____ Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, simply position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. Trend Log #: ____ This field actually contains two separate fields. The first field specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT, TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected and then press <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) WCC III Technical Guide The second field specifies the point number to edit. For the Trend Log Screen, this number can range from one to eight. If you would like to edit a different point, simply position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>. of Type: Specifies which of the four available trend logging modes (analog peak, analog trend, change-of-state, and run time) you wish to use. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ANALOG TREND, ANALOG PEAK, CHANGE OF STATE, RUN TIME> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (When you select a trend logging mode that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) 3-73 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS SAT Analog Trend Trend Log Screen Record value of: ______once every _____ minutes _______ after 48 readings Specifies the [analog] point address for which the analog trend is to be recorded. Also specifies the time interval between samples in either minutes or hours. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Specifies whether the data logging process will stop after 48 readings have been taken or will continue (roll over). Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Minutes, Hours> <Stop, Roll> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired units of time have been selected. Starting at: 00:00 on 00/00 Specifies the time and date that the trend log recording should begin. (The time is represented in 24-hour format.) The system considers *’s in these positions to be “wild cards.” Therefore, if you want the system to always log the analog trend values independent of the time, enter “*:* on */*.” Trend Log Graph The Analog Trend Screen has a graph which can be accessed by pressing <Alt> <A> to access the Action Menu and then selecting <Plot> or by pressing <Ctrl><G>. A graph which shows the value of the analog global versus time should appear on the screen. If the WCC III system is “re-painting” the screen at the moment you access the graph, the full graph will not be displayed. To make sure that you get a full graph on the screen, move the cursor to the “Home” position on the screen. Press the <Home> key to return to the Analog Trend Screen. Reset by ___________ being _______ Specifies the [binary] point address that will be used to reset (or clear) the record trend log data. The first field specifies the point address, and the second specifies the state or condition that the point address needs to be in to clear the data. Because this second field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <OFF, ON> 3-74 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS SAT Analog Peak Trend Log Screen Satellite Trend Log Summary Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXTYp, where XXX = Satellite Address #, T = Trend Log, Y = Point Number, p= Analog Peak SAT ANALOG PEAK TREND LOG SCREEN Satellite # 1 TREND LOGGING # Records time and date of high & low peaks for: A1 S1-A1 Last Low Peak: Last High Peak: 1 of Type: ANALOG PEAK Starting at: *:* on Reset by: //// being ON */* 0.0 Deg F at 08:58:34 on 11/03 50.0 Deg F at 08:23 on 12/09 Satellite #: ____ Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. Trend Log #: ____ This field actually contains two separate fields. The first field specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT, TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected and then press <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) The second field specifies the point number to edit. For the Trend Log Screen, this number can range from one to eight. If you would like to edit a different point, simply position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>. of Type: Specifies which of the four available trend logging modes (analog peak, analog trend, change-of-state, and run time) you wish to use. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: < ANALOG TREND, ANALOG PEAK, CHANGE OF STATE, RUN TIME > Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected and then press <Enter>. (When you select a trend logging mode that is different WCC III Technical Guide than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) Records time and date of high & low peaks for: Specifies the analog point address for which the analog peaks (high and low) are to be recorded. Starting at: 00:00 on 00/00 Specifies the time and date that the trend log recording should begin. (The time is represented in 24-hour format.) The system considers *’s in these positions to be “wild cards.” Therefore, if you want the system to always log the low and high peaks independent of the time and dates, enter “*.* on */*.” Reset by ______ being ____. Specifies the [binary] point address that will be used to reset (or clear) the record trend log data. The first field specifies the point address, and the second specifies the state or condition that the point address needs to be in to clear the data. Because this second field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <OFF, ON> Last Low Peak: Last High Peak: 00.0 at 00:00 on 00/00 00.0 at 00:00 on 00/00 This is the actual trend log data. It is displayed by the system from information received by the satellite. It details the value of the high and low peaks and the time and date of their occurrence. Press <Ctrl><R> to Reset Data If you want to reset (clear) the existing trend log data, you may do so by pressing and holding <Ctrl> and then pressing <R>. After several seconds this will automatically reset (clear) the data on the Trend Log Screen (you must leave the screen and come back to it for the screen to clear). On new systems, each Trend Log Screen should be reset after it has been programmed to clear out any “random data” that might be in the satellite controller. 3-75 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Logic Switch Summary Screen Logic Switch Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXLYY, where XXX = Satellite Address #, L = Logical Switch, YY = Logic Switch # LOGIC SWITCH SUMMARY SCREEN Logic Switch L1: L2: L3: L4: L5: L6: L7: L8: L9: L10: L11: L12: L13: L14: L15: L16: Description: S1-L1 S1-L2 S1-L3 S1-L4 S1-L5 S1-L6 S1-L7 S1-L8 S1-L9 S1-L10 S1-L11 S1-L12 S1-L13 S1-L14 Sl-L15 S1-L16 On 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Message #: On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On __1 Sat. #1 Off 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Message #: OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Current OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 10:14 Config On Board On Board On Board On Board On Board On Board On Board On Board On Board On Board On Board On Board On Board On Board On Board On Board 1/20 Time Delay 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Logic Switch Description Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: This location displays the descriptive message of the address. The information comes from the description area of the logic switch screen. <Analog Input, Control Output, Analog Output, Trend Logging, Logic Switch, Binary Output> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) Satellite #: ____ Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, simply position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. On Message The ON message for the logic switch is displayed here. Off Message The OFF message for the logic switch is displayed here. Current Config The current configuration of the logic switch will be displayed in this location. The value will either be ON [On Board], ON [Off Board], OFF [On Board], or OFF [Off Board]. Time Delay The Time Delay value will be displayed in this location. Time / Date The present time and date will automatically appear in the upper right corner of the screen. 3-76 To input data or to edit data on this screen, you need to access the Logic Switch Screen by positioning the cursor (shown as “>” along the left hand side of the screen) using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys to the desired point, and press <Enter>. The Logic Switch Screen will now appear. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Logic Switch Screen Logic Switch Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXLYY, where XXX = Satellite Address #, L = Logical Switch, YY = Logic Switch # LOGIC SWITCH SCREEN Satellite #1 L1: L2: L3: L4: L5: L6: L7: L8: L9: L10: L11: L12: L13: L14: L15: L16: Description: S1-L1 S1-L2 S1-L3 S1-L4 S1-L5 S1-L6 S1-L7 S1-L8 S1-L9 S1-L10 S1-L11 S1-L12 S1-L13 S1-L14 S1-L15 S1-L16 HOME for menu LOGIC SWITCH On 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Message: On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On Off 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Message: Current Config Time Delay Off OFF On Board 0 Off OFF On Board 0 Off OFF On Board 0 Off OFF On Board 0 Off OFF On Board 0 Off OFF On Board 0 Off OFF On Board 0 Off OFF On Board 0 Off OFF On Board 0 Off OFF On Board 0 Off OFF On Board 0 Off OFF On Board 0 Off OFF On Board 0 Off OFF On Board 0 Off OFF On Board 0 Off OFF On Board 0 <ANALOG IN, CONTROL O, ANALOG OU, TREND LOG, LOGIC SWI, BIN> The Logic Switch Screen looks the same as the Logic Switch Summary Screen except for the location of the “LOGIC SWITCH” and “Satellite #” labels at the top of the page. You must access the Logic Switch Screen to input or edit data. Satellite # _____ Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, simply position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. Logic Switch Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT, TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT> Description Specifies a short textual message which is displayed on Summary and Data Entry/Editing Screens to aid you in remembering points within the system. You may enter up to twelve characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed). On Message Off Message Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for the switch open state and the other for the switch closed state. These numbers are used by the system to reference a textual message which is entered in the Alarm Message Screen and then displayed in association with this switch input. Current The current value of the logic switch will be displayed in this location. The value will either be ON or OFF. Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) WCC III Technical Guide 3-77 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Logic Switch Screen Config ON Board Time Delay OFF Board The Time Delay value will be displayed in this location. When the input closes, it will stay on for this amount of time. Time is in minutes. ON Board is the corresponding dipswitch on the cover of the SAT III, including the older binary input board that plugs into the dipswitch socket. OFF Board is the new HSS port and the new HSS binary input board. NOTE: This function is only used with the HSS Binary Input Board. ON OFF STATUS SAT REC BATT ON/ OFF PULSE INPUT OPTION 3 OPTION 2 OPTION 1 LOCAL SET DISABLE LOCAL SET TEST SAT III PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER HSS REC ANALOG INPUT JUMPER SELECTION HSS XMIT ON OFF L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 LOCAL SET STATUS 1 BINARY INPUTS STATUS 2 STATUS 3 ON OFF L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SAT ADDRESS THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V 0 TO 1V INPUT THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V 0 TO 5V INPUT THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V 0 TO 10V INPUT THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V THERMISTOR INPUT THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V CURRENT INPUT A 4 TO 20 mA SENSOR WILL REQUIRE A 50 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT, OR A 250 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 5 VOLT INPUT. A 2 WIRE ROOM SENSOR WILL REQUIRE A 300 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT. A 3 WIRE ROOM SENSOR WILL NOT REQUIRE A LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT. WattMaster Controls Inc. OMRON G5Q-1A4 24V VDE 5A30VDC A250VAC ~ 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 SA H BINARY INPUTS PIN #1 ON OFF TO OTHER SAT III OR TO WCC III - MCD SAT XMIT RI PE IS N PI #1 WARNING: OBSERVE POLARITY BETWEEN THE SAT III AND THE BINARY INPUT BOARD - GROUND CONNECTIONS MUST BE THE SAME. PIN #1 24VAC 120VAC TO OTHER SAT III OR TO WCC III - MCD WIRE "T" TO "T" "R" TO "R" "SHD" TO "SHD" 120VAC WIRING IS BY OTHERS THE VA RATING FOR THE SAT III CONTROLLER IS 15VA. THE VA RATING FOR THE WCC3 BINARY INPUT BOARD (OE431-01) IS 5 VA. THE VA RATING FOR THE WCC3 V-OUT RELAY BOARD (OE430-01) IS 10 VA. THE VA RATING FOR THE WCC3 V-OUT RELAY BOARD (OE430-02) IS 20 VA. CONTACT CLOSURE TO GND ONLY WHEN CONNECTING POWER OBSERVE POLARITY 24VAC GND ST REPLACE THE DIP SWITCH IN THE SAT III COVER WITH THE SUPPLIED RIBBON CABLE. OBSERVE POLARITY SEE MANUAL FOR DIP SWITCH SETTINGS DRY INPUT CONTACTS ONLY TWO BINARY INPUT BOARDS MAY BE WIRED TO THE SAT III CONTROLLER USING THIS METHOD. CONNECT THE FIRST ONE TO L1 TO L8 SWITCH BINARY INPUTS, AND THE SECOND ONE TO L9 TO L16 SWITCH BINARY INPUTS. CONNECTION FROM SAT III TO BINARY INPUT BOARD USING THE "OLD" RIBBON CABLE CONNECTION METHOD The Binary Input with Time Delay board provides a terminal point for landing wire for a external input switch / relay contact. It interfaces to the SAT III controller via a supplied 16 pin ribbon cable with "DIP" connectors on both sides. OLD SAT II STYLE BINARY INPUT WITH TIME DELAY BOARD (YS101636) Connect "P1" on the Binary Input board to one of the two removable DIPSWITCHES on the cover of the SAT III controller. These two switches are labeled Binary Inputs on the cover of the SAT III controller. The eight Binary Inputs are dry contact closures to ground only. There is a time delay switch on the Binary Input with time delay board. This time delay switch determines how long the input will stay on after a momentary switch contact is applied to the input of the Binary Input Board. With the time delay dipswich (1 to 4) all OFF, there is no delay ON for all eight inputs. Time Delay dipswitch (1 - .5) ON there is a 12 hour delay ON for all eight inputs. Time Delay dipswitch (2 - 1) ON there is a 1 hour delay ON for all eight inputs. Time Delay dipswitch (3 - 2) ON there is a 2 hour delay ON for all eight inputs. These Dipswitch settings are additive. With Time Delay dipswitch (1 - .5, 2 - 1, and 3 - 2) ON there is a 3 12 hour delay ON for all eight inputs. This Binary Input board power requirements are 24VAC and it draws 5 VA. The 24VAC power Connection is TB2, and you must observe polarity when connecting this power connection to the SAT III. 3-78 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Logic Switch Screen +V ATI ON OFF STATUS SAT REC BATT ON/ OFF PULSE INPUT OPTION 3 OPTION 2 OPTION 1 LOCAL SET DISABLE LOCAL SET TEST L O A D PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER HSS REC GND L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 V OUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CHANNEL L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 H STATUS 1 BINARY INPUTS STATUS 2 STATUS 3 C 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SAT ADDRESS THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V 0 TO 1V INPUT THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V 0 TO 5V INPUT THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V 0 TO 10V INPUT THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V THERMISTOR INPUT THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V CURRENT INPUT A 4 TO 20 mA SENSOR WILL REQUIRE A 50 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT, OR A 250 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 5 VOLT INPUT. A 2 WIRE ROOM SENSOR WILL REQUIRE A 300 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT. A 3 WIRE ROOM SENSOR WILL NOT REQUIRE A LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT. WattMaster Controls Inc. OMRON G5Q-1A4 24V VDE 5A30VDC A250VAC ~ EACH CONTACT IS RATED FOR 24VAC OR VDC @ .5 AMP MAX H BINARY INPUTS PIN #1 ON OFF COM SA LOCAL SET ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TO OTHER SAT III OR TO WCC III - MCD ANALOG INPUT JUMPER SELECTION HSS XMIT ON OFF 0-15VDC OUTPUT MIN LOAD IS 1K OHM RESISTIVE VDC ONLY SAT III SAT XMIT 24VAC GND ST REPLACE THE DIP SWITCH IN THE SAT III COVER WITH THE SUPPLIED RIBBON CABLE. OBSERVE POLARITY SEE MANUAL FOR DIP SWITCH SETTINGS PIN #1 DRY INPUT CONTACTS ONLY RI PE IS N PI WARNING: OBSERVE POLARITY BETWEEN THE SAT III AND THE BINARY INPUT BOARD - GROUND CONNECTIONS MUST BE THE SAME. #1 TO OTHER SAT III OR TO WCC III - MCD WIRE "T" TO "T" "R" TO "R" "SHD" TO "SHD" WCC3 BINARY IN W/ TIME DELAY WATTMASTER CONTROLS, INC YS102072 REV 2 TWO BINARY INPUT BOARDS MAY BE WIRED TO THE SAT III CONTROLLER USING THIS METHOD. CONNECT THE FIRST ONE TO L1 TO L8 SWITCH BINARY INPUTS, AND THE SECOND ONE TO L9 TO L16 SWITCH BINARY INPUTS. BROWN WIRE - GND RED WIRE - 24VAC BUTT SPLICE POWER OBSERVE POLARITY 120VAC 120VAC WIRING IS BY OTHERS THE VA RATING FOR THE SAT III CONTROLLER IS 15VA. THE VA RATING FOR THE WCC3 BINARY INPUT BOARD (OE431-01) IS 5 VA. THE VA RATING FOR THE WCC3 V-OUT RELAY BOARD (OE430-01) IS 10 VA. THE VA RATING FOR THE WCC3 V-OUT RELAY BOARD (OE430-02) IS 20 VA. CONTACT CLOSURE TO GND ONLY SUPPLIED PC-01 CABLE 24VAC CONNECTION FROM SAT III TO BINARY INPUT BOARD USING THE "OLD" RIBBON CABLE CONNECTION METHOD The new WCC3 Binary Input /w time delay board provides a terminal point NEW WCC HSS BINARY INPUT WITH TIME DELAY BOARD (YS102072) for landing wire for a external input switch / relay contact. It can interface to the SAT III controller via a 16 pin ribbon cable with "DIP" connectors on both sides. Connect "J1" on the Binary Input board to one of the two removable DIPSWITCHES on the cover of the SAT III controller. These two switches are labeled Binary Inputs on the cover of the SAT III WCC3 BINARY IN W/ TIME DELAY WATTMASTER CONTROLS, INC controller. Or an alternative method of connection to the SAT III YS102072 REV 2 controller is provided by the 6 pin HSS communications port on the side of the SAT III controller. The eight Binary Inputs on the new WCC3 Binary Input /w time delay board are dry contact closures to ground only. There is a time delay switch on the new WCC3 Binary Input /w time delay board. This time delay switch determines how long the input will stay on after a momentary switch contact is applied to the input of the new WCC3 Binary Input /w time delay Board. With the time delay dipswitch (1 to 6) all OFF, there is no delay ON for all eight inputs. Time Delay dipswitch (1 - 15 MIN) ON there is a 15 minute C US delay ON for all eight inputs. Time Delay dipswitch (2 - 30 MIN) ON there is a 30 minute delay ON for all eight inputs. Time Delay dipswitch (3 - 1 HOUR) ON there is a 1 hour delay ON for all eight inputs. Time Delay dipswitch (4 - 2 HOUR) ON there is a 2 hour delay ON for all eight inputs. Time Delay dipswitch (5 - 3 HOUR) ON there is a 3 hour delay ON for all eight inputs. Time Delay dipswitch (6 - 4 HOUR) ON there is a 4 hour delay ON for all eight inputs. These Dipswitch settings are additive. With Time Delay dipswitch (1 - 15 MIN, 2 - 30 MIN, and 3 - 1 HOUR) ON there is a 1 hour and 45 minute delay ON for all eight inputs. NOTE: This Time Delay dipswitch is ignored when the Binary Input w/ time delay board is connected via the HSS port. There are 16 independant time delays on the Binary Input screen of the WCC III front end software. One for each of the 16 binary inputs. The eight input status LEDs on the new WCC3 Binary Input /w time delay board will not stay lit during a time delay when it is connected to the SAT III via the HSS port. R This Binary Input board power requirements are 24VAC and it draws 5 VA. The 24VAC power Connection is P2 or P3, and you must observe polarity when connecting this power connection to the SAT III. WCC III Technical Guide 3-79 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Logic Switch Screen SAT III CONTROLLER SAT III HSS PORT UP TO TWO WCC3 BINARY INPUT W/TIME DELAY BOARDS MAY BE WIRED TO THE SAT III CONTROLLER USING THIS METHOD. CONNECT THE FIRST WCC3 BINARY INPUT W/TIME DELAY BOARD HSS PORT TO THE SAT III CONTROLLER HSS COMMUNICATIONS PORT AND THEN CONNECT THE FIRST WCC3 BINARY INPUT W/TIME DELAY BOARD TO THE SECOND WCC3 BINARY INPUT W/TIME DELAY BOARD VIA THE SECOND HSS PORT ON THE FIRST WCC3 BINARY INPUT W/TIME DELAY BOARD . ADDITIONALLY, UP TO TWO V-OUT RELAY BOARDS MAY ALSO BE CONNECTED TO THE SAT III CONTROLLER HSS PORT. ON OFF SAT III PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER SAT XMIT HSS REC ANALOG INPUT JUMPER SELECTION HSS XMIT ON OFF L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 LOCAL SET STATUS 1 BINARY INPUTS STATUS 2 STATUS 3 ON OFF L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 H ON OFF 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BINARY INPUTS SAT ADDRESS 24VAC GND DRY INPUT CONTACTS ONLY CONTACT CLOSURE TO GROUND ONLY. NO 24VAC INPUTS STATUS SAT REC BATT ON/ OFF PULSE INPUT OPTION 3 OPTION 2 OPTION 1 LOCAL SET DISABLE LOCAL SET TEST SEE MANUAL FOR DIP SWITCH SETTINGS WCC3 BINARY IN W/ TIME DELAY WATTMASTER CONTROLS, INC YS102072 REV 2 24VAC THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V 0 TO 1V INPUT THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V 0 TO 5V INPUT THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V 0 TO 10V INPUT THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V THERMISTOR INPUT THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V CURRENT INPUT TO OTHER SAT III OR TO WCC III - MCD A 4 TO 20 mA SENSOR WILL REQUIRE A 50 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT, OR A 250 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 5 VOLT INPUT. A 2 WIRE ROOM SENSOR WILL REQUIRE A 300 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT. A 3 WIRE ROOM SENSOR WILL NOT REQUIRE A LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT. WattMaster Controls Inc. WARNING: OBSERVE POLARITY BETWEEN THE SAT III AND THE BINARY INPUT BOARD - GROUND CONNECTIONS MUST BE THE SAME. 120VAC TO OTHER SAT III OR TO WCC III - MCD WIRE "T" TO "T" "R" TO "R" "SHD" TO "SHD" 120VAC WIRING IS BY OTHERS THE VA RATING FOR THE SAT III CONTROLLER IS 15VA. THE VA RATING FOR THE WCC3 BINARY INPUT BOARD (OE431-01) IS 5 VA. THE VA RATING FOR THE WCC3 V-OUT RELAY BOARD (OE430-01) IS 10 VA. THE VA RATING FOR THE WCC3 V-OUT RELAY BOARD (OE430-02) IS 20 VA. BINARY INPUT BOARD GETS POWER AND COMMUNICATIONS TO AND FROM THE SAT III FROM THIS HSS CABLE HSS CABLE - ORDER STANDARD LENGTHS OF 1 FOOT, 1.5 FOOT, 3 FEET, 25 FEET, 40 FEET, 80 FEET AND 120 FEET MAX CONNECTION FROM A SAT III CONTROLLER TO WCC3 BINARY INPUT W/TIME DELAY BOARD USING THE "NEW" HSS CABLE CONNECTION METHOD 3-80 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Output Summary Screen Binary Output Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXOYY, where XXX = Satellite Address #, O = Binary Output, YY = Binary Output # BINARY OUTPUT SUMMARY SCREEN Binary Output Satellite # __2 Sat. #2 Time Date 08:49 1/23 Binary Outputs COMMENTS Bo1: Bo2: Bo3: Bo4: Bo5: Bo6: Bo7: Bo8: Bo9: Bo10: Bo11: Bo12: Bo13: Bo14: Bo15: Bo16: S1-BO1 S1-BO2 S1-BO3 S1-BO4 S1-BO5 S1-BO6 S1-BO7 S1-BO8 S1-BO9 S1-B10 S1-B11 S1-B12 S1-B13 S1-B14 S1-B15 S1-B16 STATUS MODE OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF RUN TIME TIME DELAY 2:55 2:55 2:55 2:55 2:55 2:55 2:55 2:55 2:55 2:55 2:55 2:55 2:55 2:55 2:55 2:55 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TOTAL RUN TIME 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ON COUNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LAST ON TIME 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00/00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 HOME for menu Binary Output Time / Date Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: The present time and date will automatically appear at these locations. <Analog Input, Control Output, Analog Output, Tren Logging, Logic Switch, Binary Output> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) Satellite # _____ Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, simply position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. WCC III Technical Guide Comments The description message which is entered on the Binary Output Screen will automatically appear here to help you identify the different binary outputs within the system. Status The present “ON” or “OFF” status of the binary output is shown here. For example, if week schedule #1 (W1) has been input to control the schedule, the message “ON” will appear here when week schedule #1 is “ON” and “OFF” will appear when week schedule #1 is “OFF”. 3-81 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Output Summary Screen Mode when using the Analog Mode Total Run Time The “alt” message will appear here when the Analog Mode Alternative Setpoint is active. When the status of the binary input which has been entered in the Binary Output Screen to select the “Analog Mode - Alternative controlled by” is “ON”, the alternative setpoint is used, and the “alt” message will appear here. This is the current accumulated run time. Run Time A trend logging feature which allows the WCC III to accumulate the amount of time a binary output has currently been “ON” or “OFF.” It will reset to zero and start over the next time it comes on. On Count This is how many times the binary output has changed from “OFF” to “ON”. Last On Time This is the time and date that the input was last “ON”. ON = Binary switch contact closed. Time Delay “Keep on Time” When the binary output is on time to go off, this Time Delay will keep it on an additional number of minutes. 3-82 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS WCC III V-Out Binary Output Board WCC III Binary Output Board / V-Out Board Sequence There are two versions of the WCC III V-Out Binary Output Board – one that has 8 fixed N.O. Relay outputs (OE430-01) and one that has an individual output jumper selectable option for N.O. or N.C. relay outputs (OE430-02). There are two modes of operation for the WCC3 V-Out Relay Board – one is the V-Out mode and the other is the Binary Output mode. These relay contacts are rated for 1 Amp at 24 VAC/VDC operation. This WCC3 V-Out Relay Board connects to the HSS expansion port on the side of the SAT III Controller. The WCC3 V-Out Relay Board is an expansion board that allows for another 8 binary outputs (relay contacts) to be used with the SAT III Controller. Up to three of these WCC3 V-Out Relay boards may be connected to the SAT III HSS expansion port. Two boards in the Binary Output mode are supported and one board in the V-Out mode is supported. One HSS WCC3 V-Out board (OE430-01) will add 10 VA of VA load while the WCC3 V-Out board (OE430-02) will add 20 VA load to the SAT III power requirement plus the loads that are connected to the 8 relay outputs of the WCC3 V-Out Relay board. WCC III Technical Guide V-Out Mode Note: These 8 Analog Input connections must be connected to the 8 Analog Outputs of the SAT III Controller in the V-Out mode of operation. These analog values are not digitally transmitted via the HSS port on the SAT III to the WCC3 V-Out Relay board in the V-Out mode. There is a load protection device called a varistor across each of the 8 relay output connections of the WCC3 V-Out Relay Board that limits the allowable voltage to no more than 32 volts AC/DC maximum at 1 amp current draw for each relay output contact. Attempting to switch any voltage greater than 32 volts or current draws of more than 1 amp per contact could and will result in damage to the WCC3 V-Out Relay Board and/or to the SAT III Controller. The connecting HSS cable is available in 1 ft., 1½ ft., 3 ft., 25 ft., 40 ft., 80 ft., and 120 ft. lengths. No more than 150 ft. of total wire can be used to power a SAT III HSS loop. 3-83 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS WCC III V-Out Binary Output Board The Dipswitch on the WCC3 V-Out Relay Board sets the various modes of operation and dead band in the V-Out mode. Dipswitch SW1-7 (MODE 2 – V-Out mode) and SW1-8 (MODE 1 – Binary Output Mode) selects the MODE of operation for the WCC3 V-Out Relay Board. If both MODE (SW1-7 and SW1-8) switches are OFF, then the WCC3 V-Out Relay Board is in Binary Output mode. Binary Output 1 to 8 is selected. If MODE 1 switch (SW1-8) is ON, then Binary Output 9 to 16 is selected. If MODE 2 Switch (SW1-7) is ON, then the V-Out mode is selected. You must cycle power to the WCC3 V-Out Relay circuit board after setting dip switch SW1-8. You may select any other dipswitch setting without cycling power to the board. SW-1 (1) (V-OUT MODE – ADDS 1 VOLT TO DEAD BAND) SW-2 (2) (V-OUT MODE – ADDS 2 VOLTS TO DEAD BAND) (V-OUT MODE DEFAULT SETTING ON) SW1-3 (4) (V-OUT MODE – ADDS 4 VOLTS TO DEAD BAND) SW1-4 (8) SW1-5 (16) SW1-6 INVERT (V-OUT MODE) (FLIPS CONDITION OF THE RELAY OUTPUTS) SW1-7 MODE 2 (V-OUT MODE) (V-OUT MODE DEFAULT SETTING ON) SW1-8 MODE 1 (When changing this switch, you must cycle power to the circuit board) V-Out Mode of Operation (Hysteresis is added to the Setpoint via setting of the SW1 Dipswitch) When the WCC3 V-Out Relay Board is set for the V-Out mode (SW1 – switch #7 ON), the relay output will turn ON when the input voltage rises above 7.5 VDC (+/- .25V) plus the dead band setting that is determined by SW1 settings. When the WCC3 V-Out Relay Board is set for the V-Out mode, the relay output will turn OFF when the input voltage drops below 7.5 VDC (+/- .25 V) minus the dead band setting that is determined by SW1 dipswitch settings. These dipswitch settings apply for all 8 inputs and outputs. When SW1-1 is selected, 1 volt is added to the dead band. (Dead band = +/- 1 volt) When SW1-2 is selected, 2 volts are added to the dead band. (Dead band = +/- 2 volts) (DEFAULT) When SW1-1 and SW1-2 are selected, 3 volts are added to the dead band. (Dead band = +/- 3 volts) When SW1-3 is selected, 4 volts are added to the dead band. (Dead band = +/- 4 volts) When SW1-3 and SW1-1 are selected, 5 volts are added to the dead band. (Dead band = +/- 5 volts) The 8 analog inputs on the WCC3 V-Out Relay board must be wired to the 8 analog outputs on the SAT III or SAT II Controller in order for the V-Out mode to function. Also, the HSS expansion port for power and ground connections to the SAT III Controller or a special two wire power and ground pigtail must be provided for connection to 24 VAC and GND to power the WCC3 V-Out Relay Board. 24 VAC polarity must be maintained between the WCC3 V-Out Relay Board and the SAT III Controller. 24 VAC must be wired to 24 VAC and ground to ground or else damage to the SAT III or WCC3 V-Out Relay Board could result. Binary Output Mode of Operation When the WCC3 V-Out Relay Board is set for the Binary Output mode (SW1 switch #8 is either ON or OFF and SW1 switch #7 is OFF), the 8 relays of the WCC3 V-Out Relay board are controlled by the WCC III program setup of the SAT Binary Output screens for each satellite controller. SW1 – switch #8 OFF is Binary Output Board address relays 1 to 8, and SW1 – switch #8 ON is Binary Output Board address relays 9 to 16. This assumes that SW1 – switch #7 is OFF. 3-84 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Output Screen Binary Output Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXOYY, where XXX = Satellite Address #, O = Binary Output, YY = Binary Output # BINARY OUTPUT SCREEN Satellite # 1 BINARY OUTPUT # Description: S1-BO3 Mode: BINARY Contact Configuration: Normal Open In local set contact set to: OPEN Controlled by input: L3 Analog Mode setup: Normal Setpoint: 0 Alternative Setpoint: 0 Hysteresis: 0 Alternative Controlled By 3 Contact Contact Minimum Minimum Open Message #: 2 off Close Message #: 1 on Off Time: 0 Minutes On Time: 0 Minutes Keep On Time: 0 Minutes //// HOME for menu Satellite # _____ Mode: __________ Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, simply position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>. Specifies the mode type of the input. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Binary Output Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT, TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) Description Enter a description for the output. The description can be up to 10 characters in length. This description will display in the Comments field on the Binary Output Summary Screen. WCC III Technical Guide <BINARY, ANALOG> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Contact Configuration: __________ Specifies the type of configuration. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Normal Open, Normal Close> Contact Open Message #: ____ Contact Closed Message #: ____ Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for the contact open state and the second for the contact closed state. These numbers refer to a message on the On/Off Units Message Screen. For example, message #1 might be “Fan On” and message #2 “Fan Off.” If you want the message on the Control Output Summary Screen to be “Fan On” when the satellite contact is closed, enter “#1” as the contact closed message etc. 3-85 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Output Screen Minimum Off Time: ____ Minutes Minimum On Time: ____ Minutes Specifies the minimum ON and OFF times for switching a load to its opposite state (i.e., ON to OFF or OFF to ON). That is, once the satellite contact closes it will remain closed for the minimum ON time, and once it opens it will remain open for the minimum OFF time. The range is 0 to 255 minutes Note that the minimum ON and OFF time has precedence over demand limiting, overrides, etc. In local set contact set to: Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <OPEN, CLOSED, HOLD LAST, Normal> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired default choice has been selected, and then press <Enter>. The term local set means that communication is lost between the MCD and the satellite controllers. If HOLD LAST is selected in the Local Set mode, the contact will stay closed if it was closed at the time the satellite went into this local set or will stay open if it was open when the satellite went into local set. Normal could be used depending on how this Binary Output is programmed; it may or may not work in a local set condition. Controlled by input: Specifies the point address that acts as the input signal source for the control range specified. Keep On Time: When the binary output is commanded to turn off, this will keep it on an additional x amount of minutes. Analog Mode setup: Analog Mode setup includes normal setpoint, alternative setpoint, hysteresis, and alternative controlled by fields. Normal Setpoint: If the “Controlled By” input value rises above this setpoint, the binary output will be active. Satellite Analog Input 1 to 8. Alternative Setpoint: This is an alternate setpoint that is selected when “Alternate Controlled By” is active. Hysteresis: Hysteresis is a software entry that allows an operator to specify how much a measure variable, such as room temperature, has to change before the switch changes state. For example, consider a temperature setpoint of 72 °F with a +/-0.5 °F hysteresis. The switch will change state (open/close) when the temperature rises to 72.5 °F and will not switch back to its original state until the temperature drops to 71.5 °F. Alternative Controlled By When this field control point is active, this field controls the Alternative Setpoint. Values include Week Schedules, Global Binary, Satellite Control Output, Satellite Binary Outputs. 3-86 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Alarm Summary Screen ALARM SUMMARY SCREEN Alarm Summary Address Class Pending Description GB2 GB3 Linux Globe Print Test 1 1 Alarm Message(s) Time 08:06 Date 1/30 HOME for menu Address: Class: This location designates the address which is, or has been, in alarm and has not been acknowledged. The listing for the alarm addresses will be in sequential order from the lowest satellite number to the highest satellite number. Twenty alarms can be viewed on one screen. To move from the present twenty alarms to the next set of twenty alarms, simply press <PgDn> (Page Down) located on the keypad to the right of the keyboard. To view the previous twenty alarms, simply press <PgUp> (Page Up) also located on the keypad. This location designates the class level (1-8) which has been assigned to the alarm. 1 is the highest priority, and 8 is the lowest priority. Description: This location displays the description message of the address. This information comes from the description area of the screen corresponding to that particular address. Alarm Message(s): Alarm Screen Access If you would like to view any of these alarms, you may move the cursor (>) to the desired alarm by using the arrow keys located on the keypad and then pressing <Enter>. This will bring you to the summary screen of the point in alarm. At this summary screen you may acknowledge the alarm if desired. (For further information on acknowledging alarms, refer to the Analog Input Summary Screen section on page 3-12.) <Ctrl A> Acknowledge Individual Alarms This location will display the alarm message associated with the particular alarm. If the address was assigned two alarm messages (a low message and a high message), the low alarm message will appear under the time and date location, and the high alarm message will appear under the Alarm Message(s) section. If you have a high and/or low alarm message and wish to see at what time and on what day the alarm occurred, you will need to go to the summary screen for the particular address to view this information. An alarm may be acknowledged at the Alarm Summary Screen by using the arrow keys to move the cursor (>) to the desired alarm and pressing <Ctrl><A>. To perform a <Ctrl><A> function, press <Ctrl> down and then press <A>, holding both keys down at the same time and then releasing both keys. <Alt A> Acknowledge All Alarms <Alt A> will bring up the Action Menu Alarms> can be initiated. WCC III Technical Guide and <Acknowledge All 3-87 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Satellite Summary Screen SATELLITE SUMMARY SCREEN Sat # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Location Power-Up Delay S1-KC 5 Seconds 15 Seconds KC Linux Test 20 Seconds Bldg.#1 B.J. S240 10 Seconds Non-Existent Non-Existent Non-Existent Test Sat3D.5 2 Minutes Test Sat3D.5 2 Minutes Test Sat3D.5 2 Minutes Test Sat3D.5 2 Minutes Non-Existent Non-Existent Non-Existent Non-Existent Satellite #16 2 Minutes Satellite #17 2 Minutes Satellite #18 2 Minutes Satellite #19 2 Minutes Satellite #20 2 Minutes Satellite Summary Alarms LOC TST by-class TYPE VER 12345678 3 2.15 12345678 3 2.14 12345678 3 2.14 12345678 3.5 2.14 Time Date 11:54 1/20 ERR 3 R 5 R 15 R 15 R 11:15 13:46 13:46 13:46 12/09/08 09/22/08 09/22/08 09/22/08 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 3D.5 3D.5 3D.5 3D.5 2.14 2.14 2.14 2.14 4 4 4 4 R R R R 14:22 14:22 14:22 14:22 09/22/08 09/22/08 09/22/08 09/22/08 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 3C 3C 3C 3C 3C 2.14 2.14 2.14 2.14 2.14 5 5 5 5 5 R R R R R 14:09 14:09 14:09 14:09 14:09 09/22/08 09/22/08 09/22/08 09/22/08 09/22/08 HOME for menu Sat #: Power-Up Delay: Twenty satellites will appear on each Satellite Summary Screen. If your system has more than twenty satellites, to view the next twenty satellites, simply press <PgDn> (Page Down) located on the keypad to the right of the keyboard. To view the previous twenty satellites, simply press <PgUp> (Page Up) also located on the keypad. This feature allows the WCC III system to soft-start a building after a main power failure. If power is lost to the building, the satellites cannot control any of the equipment because everything will be off. When power is restored, the binary output contacts on the satellite controller will remain open for the power up delay time, thus holding the equipment off. You may want to bring on a critical satellite first (lighting) and less critical satellites later. When first entering this Satellite Summary Screen, you will experience a slight delay in acquiring information on the screen. This is because the system request needs to travel the entire communication loop to gather the information needed for this particular segment of the program. Location: Caution: Please note that the contacts in the SATELLITE will remain open during the power up delay time. This should be taken into consideration when you are deciding whether an open contact in the satellite should cause the equipment to be ON or OFF. This location is a user entered message which may pertain to the name of the satellite, the location of the satellite, etc. 3-88 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Satellite Summary Screen Specific points may be soft-started within the satellite by using the Shed/Restore Programs. (For more information, consult the Shed/ Restore Programs section of this guide.) An asterisk (*) will appear to the right of the entered time when the satellite is presently in the power up delay mode. Alarms by class: This location will display the eight alarm classes associated with each satellite. When there is an alarm type active within the satellite, the alarm type number will be in reverse-video. This will aid you in acknowledging alarm conditions present within the satellite. After viewing the alarm, you should go to the Alarm Summary Screen to locate the alarm specifically. LOC: The “loc” message will appear if the “local set” switch on the front of the satellite controller is in the ON position, causing the satellite controller to operate in its local set mode. TST: This location will designate if you are operating the satellite controller in the test mode. The test mode is active if the test switch on the front of the satellite controller is in the on position. The test mode can be used to check out the operation of the system. For example, if a piece of equipment is controlled using the time clock mode, “TEST” can be input as the binary value which closes the contact to run the piece of equipment in question. To make sure the system works properly, place the test switch in the on position and the contact on the satellite controller should close to run the piece of equipment in question. TEST can be overridden on the Overrides Screen. TYPE The satellite type will appear here, either a SAT III, SAT3c, SAT3d, or SAT3f. Time / Date The present time and date will automatically appear in these locations. WCC III Technical Guide VER: The satellite controllers have their own software. This location will tell you what version of software your satellite controllers have. This is necessary for any updates or changes in software for the satellites in the future. ERR: This location is generally used for monitoring transmission and receiving errors. This information is to aid in trouble-shooting various problems associated with the communications of the system. SOS If the system determines that a satellite controller has stopped communicating, an SOS (Satellite Out of Service) message will appear on the screen. TOS: If the SAT3C/D/F determines that a TUC controller has stopped communicating, a TOS (TUC Out of Service) message will appear on the screen. Other Functions: Clear Error/Clear All Errors: While at the Satellite Summary Screen, select <Action>,<Clear Error> to clear an error located in the ERR column. You must have the desired row highlighted in order to do this. Select <Action>,<Clear All Errors> to clear all errors. Delete Satellite: To delete a satellite, from the Main Menu Tool Bar, place the cursor on the satellite you wish to delete and then select <Action>, <Delete Satellite>. Force Search Satellite: To search for a satellite, from the Main Menu Tool Bar, place the cursor on the satellite number you are searching for and then select <Action>, <Force Search Satellite>. 3-89 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Rebuild Satellite Tables REBUILD SATELLITE TABLES The data pattern tables for the satellite controllers need to be rebuilt whenever any of the following events occur: 1. A new WCC III system is installed. 2. New software is installed in the MCD or the satellite controller. 3. New hardware is installed in the system (i.e. new satellite controllers, new MCOMM communication board in the MCD, etc.). For a new system, or for new satellite controllers installed in an existing system, the tables should be (re)built before the programming data is entered. Satellite Number: Before a value is displayed on the screen, the system checks to see where the decimal point should go. The pattern is called the “Data Pattern.” In the WCC III system, there are four data patterns allowed. They are “x,xxx”, “xxx.x”, “xx.xx”, and “x.xxx.” (The x’s are used to denote numeric values and are not to be taken literally.) Additionally, rebuilding the data tables insures that the proper units of measure, ON/OFF, and alarm messages will be displayed with its associated number. This entry allows you to designate the number of the satellite controller which will have its table rebuilt. After the data tables are rebuilt, the data tables will be saved on the hard disk. Select this option to rebuild the data table for only one satellite. Enter the satellite number and then select the option to <Rebuild One Table>. To rebuild all tables, type a zero in the satellite number field and select <Rebuild All Tables>. Rebuild One Table: Rebuild All Tables: Rebuild Satellite Unit/Pattern Table: To rebuild one or more satellite tables, from the Main Menu Tool Bar select <Action>, <Rebuild Satellite Unit/Pattern Table>. The following window will appear: 3-90 To insure proper rebuilding of tables, we recommend that you select this option to allow the system to rebuild data tables for all of the satellite controllers and the Global Analog Screens. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Override Screen OVERRIDE SCREEN ADDRESS W12 S5 GB9 GA15 GA10 184K2C Type/Value Off Off On 72.5 Deg F 30.0 Deg F Schd On OVERRIDE SCHEDULES Starting TIME MONTH DAY 745 2 15 745 2 15 745 2 15 950 2 16 1130 3 17 900 4 11 TIME 845 845 845 1200 2200 1500 End MONTH 2 2 2 2 3 4 DAY 15 15 15 17 18 14 HOME for menu This screen allows you to override addresses within the system for programmable time periods. The allowable choices for override type depend on the password level. With Level 1 Password, choices are <Schd On, Schd Off> With Level 2 Password, choices are <SchdON, SchdOff> With Level 3 Password, choices are <ALL> Type/Value The Type or Value of the address is entered in this position. A binary type of address will have a type of either being ON or OFF. An analog address will have a numerical value such as °F, PSI, KW, % Sun, etc. ----- Starting ADDRESS ----- End This is a user entered field which initiates the Override program of the WCC III system. Addresses which may be used on this screen are shown below: The Start and End portion of the program is where you enter the Time, Month, and Day for the override to occur. The override will erase itself from the screen after the override has been completed. # = Satellite address number Clear Structure #An #Pn #KnH #KnC Wn Sn GBn GAn #RnA #RnB #Cn #On #Ln - Analog Input (n = 1 to 8) Analog Output (n = 1 to 8) Control Output (H Contact) (n = 1 to 8) Control Output (C contact) (n = 1 to 8) Week Schedule (n = 1 to 128) Optimal Start (n = 1 to 64) Binary Global (n = 1 to 512) Analog Global (n = 1 to 256) Data Register (n = 1 to 8) Data Register (n = 1 to 8) Comparator (n = 1 to 8) Binary Out (n = 1 to 16) Binary Input (n = 1 to 16) WCC III Technical Guide Select ----- ----- <Clear Structure> from the Action Menu or select the Clear Structure icon to clear the values from the screen. NOTE: Values entered may remain after you clear the structure until you leave the screen and return to the Main Menu and then open the Override Screen again. 3-91 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Holiday Schedule Screen HOLIDAY SCHEDULE SCREEN HOLIDAY SCHEDULE TIME 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ----------------------- Start MONTH 10 11 11 11 11 11 ----------------------- DAY 26 2 9 16 23 30 ----------------------- TIME 2359 2359 2359 2359 2359 2359 2359 --------------------- End MONTH 7 11 11 11 11 11 11 --------------------- DAY 4 2 9 9 16 23 30 --------------------- HOME for menu --------Start-------TIME MONTH DAY ---------End--------TIME MONTH DAY Enter the Start time, month, and day that you wish to begin a holiday. Then enter the End time, month, and day that you wish to end the holiday. The time is in 24-hour format, the month has a range of 1 to 12 (1 for January and 12 for December), and the day can range from 1 to 31 (depending on the month). The Holidays may be entered up to one year in advance and may be entered out of sequence. Each week schedule has a location at the bottom of the screen named HOL as shown in the Week Schedule Screen. This HOL location becomes active on the dates listed on the Holiday Schedule Screen. There must be at least eight hours between the Start time and End time of the Holiday. If a shorter time is needed, you will need to set up the strategies within the Override Screen, described on page 3-91. 3-92 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Holiday Schedule Screen Week Schedule Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is Wnn, where W = Week Schedule and nn = Week Schedule# WEEK SCHEDULE 1 Description: Linux Week Schedule Current status Night Week On Message #: Off Message #: DAY 7 8 Week Day Week Night EVENT OFF WED 0707 Password level req’d to alter: EVENT EVENT EVENT EVENT EVENT MON TUE on on 0800 0800 off off 1700 1700 ----- ----- ----- ----- WED THR on on 0800 0800 off off 1700 1700 ----- ----- ----- ----- FRI SAT on on 0800 1000 off off 1700 1400 ----- ----- ----- ----- SUN HOL off off 1000 0000 off --- ----- ----- ----- ----- 3 HOME for menu The week schedule will obey the entries listed on the HOL line when a holiday occurs. In this example, the week schedule will be OFF on the dates listed as holidays on the Holiday Screen. (When the system sees ---, it will remain in its present state until it sees the next on or off command.) There must be at least eight hours between the Start time and End time of the Holiday. If a shorter time is needed, you will need to set up the strategies within the Override Screen, described on page 3-91. The data on this screen DOES NOT erase itself after the holiday has been completed. If you need to erase a particular holiday, simply position the cursor over the value in the month column at the left hand side of the screen of the holiday in question. Press <Ctrl> and then <Home>, holding both keys down at the same time and then releasing them. The <Ctrl><Home> feature will clear out one holiday at a time. To perform the <Ctrl><Home> function, you must have a level 3 access code. NOTE: Values entered may remain after you clear the Holiday until you leave the screen and return to the Main Menu and then open the Holiday Schedule Screen again. WCC III Technical Guide 3-93 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS System Parameters Screen SYSTEM PARAMETERS SCREEN System Parameters Page 1 Present Time Authentication: Auto Time Month Day Year User Name: [email protected] 0710 1 21 9 Password: MCD@8500 System ID: Kansas City (On the Wall) System. Port Number 25 E-mail SMTP Server: mail.wcc-controls.com Reply E-mail Address: [email protected] Alarm Type 1 2 3 4 5 Operator: Time out: Disabled by 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 120 Minutes E-mail Address 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Code: Local print: YES The WCC3 System Parameters Screen is used to enable, disable, and setup E-mailing of Alarms for the WCC3 system. Page: The Page field at the very top of the WCC3 System Parameters Screen refers to the fact that there can be up to 4 separate pages for the setup of various E-mail addresses that then can be filled out, so that up to 12 separate E-mail Addresses per Alarm type can send out Alarm E-mails. These Alarm Call-out E-mails are based upon “Alarm Type” 1 through 5 only. Alarm types 6, 7 and 8 do not, and cannot, cause an Alarm Call-out E-mail to be sent out. All of the programmed setup information for the “Present time”, “Authentication:”, “User Name:”, “System ID:”, “Password:”. “E-mail SMTP Server:”, “Reply E-mail Address:”, “Time out:”, and “Local Print:” fields do not change with the Page toggle function. 3-94 Name Mark Mark Mark Mark Mark Mark Repeat Lehman Lehman Lehman Lehman Lehman Lehman 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Delay 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 View Screen Only Present Time Time Month Day Year: Specifies the current time and date. The time is in 24-hour format, the month has a range of 1 to 12 (1 for January and 12 for December), and the day can range from 1 to 31 (depending on the current month). User Name: Password: For e-mail servers that require authentication, the username field needs to have a valid user name. The password field needs to have a valid password that matches with the User Name. Both of these fields’ data comes from your Internet Service Provider or from your IT Personnel. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS System Parameters Screen The User Name can be up to 30 characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed). The password can be up to 20 characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed). The User Name and Password are the ones set up for the Backtask program’s e-mail account. Both the user name and password are case-sensitive. LOGIN: Authentication: Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), are cryptographic protocols that provide a level of security for secure communications over networks such as the Internet. For e-mail servers that require authentication, this field should be set to Auto, Login or Plain. For e-mail servers that do not require authentication, this field should be set to “No.” - See your Internet provider and/or IT personnel for this setting. E-mail authentication from the WCC3 system is the effort to equip E-mail messages of the WCC3 e-mail transport system with enough verifiable information, so that the End User recipient’s E-mail server can recognize the nature of each incoming message from the WCC III - MCD email’s SMTP automatically without rejecting it as SPAM. WattMaster Controls, Inc. supports 4 basic types of E-mail authentication— AUTO, PLAIN, LOGIN, and CRAM-MD5. AUTO: In the WCC3 system, the selection for authentication “AUTO” applies to The Password Authentication Protocol (capitalized) and is sometimes abbreviated PAP. PAP is a simple password authentication protocol that is used to authenticate a user to a network access server used for example by internet service providers. PAP is used by Point to Point Protocol to validate users before allowing them access to server resources. Almost all network operating system remote E-mail servers support PAP. It requires that you have both a legitimate “User Name” and “Password”. PLAIN: In the WCC3 system, the selection for authentication “PLAIN” applies to unencrypted “Plain” text that is sent to and from the E-mail SMTP server. It is most commonly associated with a POP3 type E-mail server. The Post Office Protocol (POP) is an application-layer Internet standard protocol used by E-mail user accounts to send and retrieve e-mail from a remote server over a TCP/IP connection. POP and IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) are the two most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e-mail retrieval. Virtually all modern e-mail clients and servers support both. The POP protocol has been developed through several versions with version 3 (POP3) being the current standard. WCC III Technical Guide Login Authentication is a process closely related to identification. In online E-mail environments where “login” authentication is required, the username identifies the user, while the password authenticates that the user is whom he or she claims to be. Typically, the “Login” authentication is used on E-mail servers with SSL type E-mail protocols. CRAM-MD: In CRAM-MD5 authentication, the server first sends a challenge string to the client. The client responds with a username followed by a space character and then a 16-byte digest in hexadecimal notation. The digest is the output of HMAC-MD5 with the user’s password as the secret key and the server’s original challenge as the message. The server also calculates its own digest with its notion of the user’s password, and if the client’s digest and the server’s digest match then authentication is successful. This provides three important types of security. First, others cannot duplicate the hash without knowing the password. This provides authentication. Second, others cannot replay the hash—it is dependent on the unpredictable challenge. This is variously called freshness or replay prevention. Third, observers do not learn the password. This is called secrecy. The two important features of this protocol that provide these three security benefits are the one-way hash and the fresh random challenge. System ID: The system ID field on the WCC3 System Parameters Screen is used to identify the actual physical location of the WCC3 system. This System ID “Name” will be on all of the E-mails that this specific WCC III - MCD will send out, in the center of the Main Screen of the WCC3.exe program, and on the Energy Consumption Table. This field on the WCC3 System Parameters Screen is limited to 50 total characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed) for the System ID.E-Mail SMTP Server: 3-95 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS System Parameters Screen E-Mail SMTP Server: Disabled by (SMTP) Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is an Internet standard for electronic mail (e-mail) transmission across Internet Protocol (IP) networks. This field on the WCC3 System Parameters screen is limited to 52 total characters for the E-mail address. The Disabled by field is used to enable or disable the specific alarm type. (Remember that there can be 4 pages of E-mail addresses.) An “ON” or “1” disables the E-mailing of the Alarm type Callout function per E-mail address. An “OFF” or “0” enables the E-mailing of the Alarm type Call-out function per E-mail address. WattMaster Controls can and will usually provide an initial E-Mail SMTP server for the initial setup of the WCC III - MCD when it is first installed. This SMTP Server that is provided by WattMaster Controls is not guaranteed to last for the life of the WCC3 system. At some point in the future, there may also be a service fee associated with maintaining this SMTP server from WattMaster Controls. Port Number The WCC3.exe program opens a two-way, secure communications port that then allows for communication between WCC III – MCD and the WCC3.exe program that is running on the WCC III front end computer. This IP Address connection is done on a higher address port number than normal (WCC III connection is port number 39289) to help reduce the risk of computer hacking. Port Number 25 should always be used on the WCC3 system, but in rare instances other port addresses can be used to improve security on the WCC III – MCD. This generally requires advanced IT support for implementation. Port Number “25” is the usual TCP port for common SMTP operation. Reply E-mail Address: Some E-mail SMTP servers require a reply E-mail address during the Authentication process. The End User on the WCC3 system with internet access should have an E-mail address that usually is provided with the static internet address or static Host name that comes from the internet service provider. This field on the WCC3 System Parameters Screen is limited to 52 total characters for the E-mail address. Alarm Type: There are 5 Alarm types that can be programmed to send out an Alarm E-mail to specific E-mail address. 3-96 This “Disabled by” field can be programmed with the following: 0 (OFF), 1(ON), WXXX (Week Schedules), SXXX (Optimal Starts), GBXXX (Global Binaries), new day, new hour, new min, GCXXX, GHXXX, GLXXX (Tenant Override groups), LOCSET (Local Set Mode), TEST (TEST Mode), / = / / / / (For Null value). Just remember that the / / / / is a Null function that is neither “ON” or “OFF”, but is generally treated as “OFF” condition but not always. Email Address The E-mail Address field on the WCC3 System Parameters Screen is the E-mail address that you want send the specific WCC3 Alarm E-mail that is based on Alarm type 1 to 5. There can be up to 12 E-mail address per alarm type. This E-mail Address field on the WCC3 System Parameters Screen is limited to 50 total characters for the E-mail address. 1st, 2nd, 3rd Email Address The “1st” E-mail Address is the primary or the first E-mail address that the WCC3 alarm type (1 to 5) will send an E-mail alarm to. The “2nd” E-mail Address is the secondary or second E-mail address that the WCC3 alarm type (1 to 5) will send an E-mail to after sending the first E-mail of the alarm type. The “3rd” E-mail Address is the tertiary or third E-mail address that the WCC3 alarm type (1 to 5) will send an E-mail to after sending the second E-mail of the alarm type. NOTE: On only the first 3 alarm class 1 E-mail addresses on page 1 of the System Parameters E-mail addresses will receive a automated Satellite Off System (SOS) E-mail message that is sent out to these E-mail addresses when a Satellite controller or multiple Satellite Controllers go off line (SOS). See the Alarms section of this manual for more information on Satellite alarms. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS System Parameters Screen Repeat Code The “Repeat” function is time in minutes to send out a repeated E-mail after the first e-mail is sent, and keep repeat sending this E-mail every “X” amount of minutes until the alarm is acknowledged. This code is short for “Passcode” which is a numerical value of 000000000 to 9999999999. This is for security purposes, as each specific operator of the WCC3 system should have his or her Operator’s Name and “Code” and then enter them in the space provided. This “Code” field on the WCC3 System Parameters Screen is limited to 10 total characters. Delay The “Delay” function is time in minutes before the E-mailing of the alarm to the 2nd and 3rd E-mail addresses after the E-mail is sent to the 1st e-mail address. Operator All WCC3 users or “Operators” should have their name entered in this field. This is for security purposes, as each specific operator of the WCC3 system should have his or her Operator’s Name and “Code” and then enter them in the space provided. This “Operator” field on the WCC3 System Parameters Screen is limited to 16 total characters. Please note that all of this “Operator Log in” information is kept track of in the WCC3 system log. WCC III Technical Guide Time Out The time out is the time in minutes before the WCC3 program will automatically sign you out after you have not moved the mouse or pressed a key on the keyboard. All password levels are returned to a password level 0. Local Print: This function is a carry over from the old WCC2 system and is not used on the WCC3 system. 3-97 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Operator Codes Screen OPERATOR CODES SCREEN ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Operator Codes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. Level Level Level Level Operator 3 33333 John Mark 1 2 0 1 2 3 = = = = Code: 3 3333 Rentko Lehman 1 2 Level 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 View Only General entry allowed Level 1 + modes, globals & energy management options Level 2 + system parameters & operator codes HOME for system parameters Operator Level Specifies the password that identifies an operator. A character, symbol, number or a space (press <space bar>) should be entered for 1-16 spaces (control codes, ALT codes, and double quote characters are not allowed). Specifies the level of priority that is to be assigned to an operator. This value can range from zero (lowest priority) to 3 (highest priority). These values are displayed at the bottom of the screen and are explained in further detail on page 3-91. Code Specifies a password code for that operator. This protects the system from unauthorized use. A character, symbol, number, or space (press <space bar>) should be entered for 1-10 spaces (control codes, ALT codes, and double quote characters are not allowed). 3-98 Level 0 is view only access. Level 1 is general entry allowed. Level 2 is Level 1 + modes, globals, and energy management. Level 3 is Level 2 + system parameters and operator codes. HOME Press <Home> to return to the System Parameters Screen. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS On/Off and Units of Measure Messages Screen ON/OFF AND UNITS OF MEASURE MESSAGES SCREEN 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. On Off CWV *NO* CWV *OK* Flow No Flow Day Night No Call Call On/Off Messages 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Deg F KW GPM Gallon % RH % Sun Deg C KW Units-of-Measure Messages 9. Volts 10. -1011. -1112. -1213. -1314. -1415. -1516. -16- Fan ON Fan OFF Pump ON Pump OFF are-----> -16-17-18Lites ON Lites OFF 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. Chlr. ON Chlr. OFF Pump ON Pump OFF -25-26-27-28-29-30- 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. -17-18-19-20-21-22-23-24- HOME for menu The WCC III system will accept up to 30 On/Off messages which can have up to eight characters each. The number which corresponds to the message is entered on a Data Input Screen. As the number is entered, the system automatically prints the message on the Data Input Screen and the appropriate summary screen(s). If you are beginning to “program” the WCC III system for the first time, you may wish to print these screens. The WCC III system will accept up to 24 units of measure messages which can have up to six characters each. The number which corresponds to the message is entered on a Data Input Screen. As the number is entered, the system automatically prints the message on the Data Input Screen and the appropriate summary screen(s). WCC III Technical Guide 3-99 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Alarm Messages Screen ALARM MESSAGES SCREEN 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Alarm Messages Low Temp High Temp Alarm GB1 (55-85) Peak KW Global Alarm Temp Out of Range -7-8R-T Alarm > Limit -10-11-12-13-14-15-16-17-18-19-20- 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. -21-22-23-24-25-26-27-28-29-30-31-32-33-34-35-36-37-38-39-40- 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. -41-42-43-44-45-46-47-48-49-50-51-52-53-54-55-56-57-58-59-60- HOME for menu The WCC III system will accept up to 60 alarm messages which can have up to 16 characters each. The number which corresponds to the message is entered on a Data Input Screen. As the number is entered, the system automatically prints the message on the Data Input Screen and the appropriate summary screen(s). If you are beginning to “program” the WCC III system for the first time, you may wish to print a copy of this screen. These alarm messages will be the messages that are in the emails that are sent in the Alarm Type field that is selected on the various different screens that have alarm fields in them. 3-100 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Secure the System SECURE THE SYSTEM This position on the Main Menu Screen is used for signing off after you are finished using the system. To sign off, place the cursor over “Secure the System” by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, and press <Enter>. This will cause the access level to return to zero which allows the operator to “View Screens Only.” The WCC III system has an automatic lock-out feature which automatically monitors keyboard activity. If there has not been any keyboard activity for a set period of time, the system will automatically sign off and secure the system to a level zero access. The amount of time which will cause the system to automatically sign off is entered on the System Parameters Screen. WCC III Technical Guide 3-101 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Energy Consumption Screen ENERGY CONSUMPTION SCREEN E N E R G Y C O N S U M P T I O N 1 S U M M A R Y 08:29 1/30 Kansas City (On the Wall) System Current Consumption Statistics Satellite #: 24 Current Demand: 3 KW Consumption since last reset: 0 KWH Demand from: GA O Description: Linux Consumption Consumption: Peak Demand: Time of Peak: Today 0 KWH 3 KW 10:20 Energy Consumption History Yesterday This Month 0 KWH 1200 KWH 3 KW 65 KW 00:01 00:01 01/01 Consumption Past 60 Days in KWH: Last Month 4200 KWH 72 KW 00:01 12/01 Average over 0 in KWH HOME for menu The WCC III system has 50 Energy Consumption Screens. The number directly under the ENERGY CONSUMPTION SUMMARY title is the number of the screen. To change the number, move the cursor to this field, enter the number you would like, and then press <Enter>. Kansas City (On the Wall) System The same message that is entered on the System Parameter Screen to identify the system is automatically printed on the Energy Consumption Screen. Time / Date The present time and date will automatically appear at the upper right corner of the screen. Satellite #: 1 Enter the number of the satellite controller which has the pulse type kw meter connected to it. 3-102 NOTE: On a SAT III Controller, the pulse meter must be connected to the analog input #1 on the satellite controller, and the pulse switch on the front of the satellite controller must be in the “On” position and a 5 VDC signal (from the Satellite’s V-Out) must be connected to one side of the pulse meter contact. Current Demand and Consumption Since Last Reset: The current demand and the current consumption since last reset are automatically displayed here. To reset the consumption, select <Action> from the Top Menu Bar and then select <Reset>. The following units may be selected for consumption by placing the cursor over the units for the “Consumption since last reset,” pressing the <space bar> until the desired units appear, and then pressing <Enter>: WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Energy Consumption Screen KWH = 1 KWH DKH = 10 KWH HKH = 100 KWH MWH = 1,000 KWH DMH = 10,000 KWH HMH = 100,000 KWH GWH = 1,000,000 KWH DGW = 10,000,000 KWH 5428 KWH will appear as 543 DKH 5428 KWH will appear as 54 HKH, etc. The units selected will appear for the consumption since last reset and also for the monthly consumption. The maximum value of 9999 for monthly consumption should be taken into consideration when selecting units. The significant figures will be adjusted as different choices are selected. For example, if you have a present value of 5428 KWH, and you change the units from KWH to HKH, 54 HKH will appear on the screen. If you then change back to KWH, 5400 KWH will appear. <Consumption> <Demand> You may select either Consumption or Demand by placing the cursor in this field, pressing the <space bar> until the desired word appears and then pressing <Enter>. <Past 60 Days> <Past 12 Months> You may also choose to display the past 60 days of data or the past 12 months by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. You may move the cursor down into the consumption or demand table and manually enter the KWH demand for certain days or months. Demand From: GA 0 If you would like to average the kwh of the building using the sliding window feature of the analog globals, enter the number of the analog global which has the building kwh. If you want to read the kwh from the satellite controller directly, enter GA0. Energy Consumption History The system will automatically show what the consumption (kwh) and demand (KW) is for today, yesterday, this month, and last month. The system will also show the time and date when the peak occurred. WCC III Technical Guide 3-103 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Energy Consumption Screen 3-104 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Energy Consumption Screen SAT III CONTROLLER (+) KW METER TO HSS EXPANSION BOARDS. UP TO TWO BINARY INPUT BOARDS AND UP TO TWO V-OUT RELAY BOARDS MAY BE CONNECTED TO A SAT III CONTROLLER. (-) ON OFF SAT III Typical Wiring Diagram Use the following Pulse Meter E-Mon D-Mon Series 2000 with the P2 Pulser Output Module option Can only connect One Pulse Meter per SAT III. BATT ON/ OFF PULSE INPUT OPTION 3 OPTION 2 OPTION 1 LOCAL SET DISABLE LOCAL SET TEST L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 SAT III Ain #1 jumper set for 0-5V input, Vout #1 output voltage programmed for constant 5 volt output. PULSE INPUT switch "ON". PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS 1 STATUS 2 STATUS 3 ON OFF L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 H (-) (-) KW METER KW METER KW METER EACH CONTACT IS RATED FOR 24VAC OR VDC @ .5 AMP MAX SAT ADDRESS (+) (+) SAT 3P CONTROLLER (+) 24VAC (-) KW METER 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BINARY INPUTS GND (-) ANALOG INPUT JUMPER SELECTION LOCAL SET BINARY INPUTS ON OFF SAT 3P Typical Wiring Diagram Use the following Pulse Meter E-Mon D-Mon Series 2000 with P2 Pulser Output Module option. Times eight Pulse Meters. SAT III HSS REC HSS XMIT ON OFF 0-15VDC OUTPUT MIN LOAD IS 1K OHM RESISTIVE VDC ONLY STATUS SAT REC SAT XMIT SATIII-P P1 0 TO 5V INPUT THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V 0 TO 10V INPUT THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V THERMISTOR INPUT THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V CURRENT INPUT A 4 TO 20 mA SENSOR WILL REQUIRE A 50 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT, OR A 250 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 5 VOLT INPUT. A 2 WIRE ROOM SENSOR WILL REQUIRE A 300 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT. A 3 WIRE ROOM SENSOR WILL NOT REQUIRE A LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT. WattMaster Controls Inc. 24VAC FUSED 120VAC GROUND PULSE METER BOARD ATTMASTER CONTROLS YS102268 REV0 P2 (+) 0 TO 1V INPUT THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V WARNING: OBSERVE POLARITY BETWEEN THE SAT III CONTROLLER AND THE SAT 3P CONTROLLER GROUND CONNECTIONS MUST BE THE SAME. 24VAC PULSE INPUTS THERM 0 - 10V 0 - 5V 0 - 1V TO OTHER SAT III OR TO WCC III - MCD P3 MADE IN USA P4 P5 (-) KW METER P6 P7 (+) GND (-) (-) KW METER OPTIONS SEL (+) PULSE 5 PULSE 6 PULSE 7 PULSE 8 STAT REC STAT XMIT LOCAL SET STATUS P8 GND KW METER PULSE 1 PULSE 2 PULSE 3 PULSE 4 TOTAL WIRING FOR EACH INPUT NOT TO EXCEED 100 FEET. USE 18 GAUGE TWISTED PAIR WITH SHIELD FOR EACH PULSE METER CONNECTION. CONNECT THE SHIELD WIRE TO GND. TEST LOCAL L DIS OPT 1 OPT 2 OPT 3 “P” MODE ADDRESSING NOTES SAT III ADDRESSING STARTSAT ADDRESS NUMBER 8. EACH "P" MODE SAT III TAKES UP (8) SAT III LOGICAL ADDRESSES. THERE ARE ONLY (8) USED ACTIVE INPUTS PER SAT 3P. ANALOG INPUT #1 (PULSE INPUT #1) ON EACH SAT III ADDRESS IS ACTIVE. ALL OTHER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ON THE SAT 3P ARE NOT FUNCTIONAL. ADDRESS POWER (+) ADD 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 120VAC WIRING IS BY OTHERS THE VA RATING FOR THE SAT III IS 15 VA. THE VA RATING FOR THE SAT 3C IS 10 VA. THE VA RATING FOR THE SAT 3D IS 10 VA. THE VA RATING FOR THE SAT 3P IS 3 VA. COMM 24 VAC R GND SH T (-) KW METER (+) WARNING: OBSERVE POLARITY BETWEEN THE SAT 3P CONTROLLER AND THE SAT III CONTROLLER GROUND CONNECTIONS MUST BE THE SAME. WCC III Technical Guide TO OTHER SAT III CONTROLLERS, SAT 3C CONTROLLERS, SAT 3D CONTROLLERS, OR SAT 3P CONTROLLERS, OR TO THE WCC III - MCD COMPUTER. WIRE "R" TO "R", "T" TO "T", "SHLD" TO "SHD" 3-105 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Custom Screens CUSTOM SCREENS Custom Slide 1. ScrTest 1 2. ScrTest 2 3. ScrTest 3 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. Test 22 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. Test 43 Double click left button to start Slide Show Screen. While in Slide Show Screen, hit [CtrlU] to toggle update. Hit [Enter] to enter Edit Mode. Hit [Enter] to add a new logic address. Hit [CtrlF] to find nearest logic address. Hit [CtrlD] to delete a logic address. HOME for menu The Custom Screen program allows you to capture custom text screens and create actual dynamic values from points within the WCC III system. Up to 60 screens can be created, and up to 100 points (temperatures, ON/OFF status etc.) can be placed on the screen. You first need to create a text file with a txt extension. We recommend using Notepad. Notepad creates and edits text files using basic text formatting. Notepad is located in the Accessories folder that comes with your Windows program. To access Notepad, click <Start>, <All Programs>, <Accessories>, <Notepad>. The file you create needs to be saved or copied to the same directory or sub-directory as the WCC III software. This is usually C:\ProgramFiles\WCC III\wcc3. 3-106 Use the following procedure to cause the WCC III to read the file from the Custom Screen Program. Step 1: From the WCC III Main Menu, highlight <Custom Screens> and press <Enter>. Step 2: Type the name of the file without the “txt” extension and press <Enter>. In our example, the word “ScrTest 1” would be entered. Step 3: The screen you created will appear in the Custom Slide Screen. Press <Enter> to enter Edit Mode. Step 4: Press <Enter> again to place the values of points within the WCC III System on the screen. In other words, you can place an analog value such as temperature or pressure or a binary value such as fan status on the screen. Up to 100 values may be placed on the screen. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Custom Screens <Ctrl-U> Toggle Updating The values of the WCC III points on the Custom Screen are “dynamic.” That is, the values on the screen will change as the value of the point changes. However, you have the option of “freezing” the points at their present value by pressing <Ctrl> and <U> while the Custom Screen is displayed on the monitor. To return to “live” data, press <Ctrl> and <U> again. Place Points on the Custom Screen To place points on the Custom Screen, first access the Custom Screen by typing in its name in one of the numbered fields. Pressing <Enter> once allows you to move the cursor by using the arrow keys. When the cursor is at the place where you want the point value to be displayed, press <Enter> again, and the four slashes (////) will appear on the screen. Then type the point designation and press <Enter>. For example, if you want the value from satellite #2 analog input #4, enter 2A4. Then press <Home>, and the point value will appear on the screen. Delete a Point Address on the Custom Screen To delete a point on the Custom Screen, first you must have the cursor in the exact location it was when the point was placed on the screen. To simplify finding this location, you may move the cursor near the existing point and then press <Ctrl> and <F> simultaneously to cause the cursor to move to the exact position where the point was created. You may delete the point by pressing <Ctrl> and <D> simultaneously, and then pressing <Enter>. The four slashes (////) will then appear. You may enter a new point, or to remove the slashes, leave the screen by pressing <Home> twice, and then re-access the screen. Function of Keys While in Custom Screen + or PgUp Step forward one slide - or PgDn Step backward one slide Home or Esc or Ctrl+E Exit screen Ctrl+U Toggle update Enter Enter edit logic address mode Enter or Ins Create logic address Ctrl+D or Del Delete logic address Home or Esc Press once to display point value after entering logic address; Press again to leave edit logic address mode + Change color Tab Next logic address Uploading and Downloading of User created Custom Screens and BitMap Screens. The WCC3.exe program version 2.27 and above has the ability to additionally store the end user created Custom Screens and BitMap Screens files on the WCC III – MCD. These stored files on the WCC III – MCD now include the WCC3.exe generated Custom Screens (Text Based) and BitMap screens (BMP pictures) and the associated data files. By uploading or sending of files to the WCC III – MCD, and by then by downloading or receiving files from the WCC III – MCD, it is now possible to synchronize all of these screens so that all of the WCC3 front end computer end users can now see and then use all of these files. This makes for easier distribution of the needed files for the WCC3 front end computer end users to better create and then keep track of, or updating of these WCC3 front end computer end user generated screen files. When the WCC3 front end computer end user creates a simple bitmap or custom text screen, these files are initially kept in the end users Windows based computer under the following subdirectory structure. C:Program Files\WCCIII\JobName subdirectory. (Please note that the JobName subdirectory is dependent on the Job Name that the end user has named his jobsite on the WCC3. exe “Access Job Site” menu on the initial Connection Dialog Box when starting the WCC3.exe program.) If there are more than one WCC3 front end computer end users then this is the mechanism that should now be used to synchronize all of the WCC3 front end computers end user created bitmap screens and custom text screens. These end user created bitmap screens or custom text screens are now also can be kept in the SlideFiles subdirectory in the Backtask subdirectory on the WCC III – MCD, if they are uploaded to the WCC III – MCD, but please note that they are not part of the secure nightly and monthly backup of the WCC III – MCD data that occur automatically every night, and every month. NOTE: Do not use <Tab> when creating your text (.txt) document. WCC III Technical Guide 3-107 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Custom Screens Located at the very bottom of the right hand portion of the WCC3 screen there is a status bar that displays the status of the various files that are being uploaded or downloaded to the WCC III – MCD. After selecting the “Download Slide Screen Files” which causes the downloading of these files to the WCC3 user’s computer, you must then exit the WCC3.exe program, and then restart the WCC3. exe program to view these newly downloaded files. You can also verify that the uploading and downloading of these files has occurred with the System Event Log that is within the WCCUtilities.exe program. At the top of the WCC3.exe screen there is a pull down menu under “File” selection that has these two new options to either “Upload Slide Screen Files” or to “Download Slide Screen Files”. You must have level 3 access to “Upload Slide Screen Files” or to “Download Slide Screen Files” from the WCC III - MCD. Important reminder: “Upload Slide Screen Files” send files to the WCC III – MCD from the WCC3 user computer. “Download Slide Screen Files” receives files from the WCC III – MCD that goes to the WCC3 user computer. There is not an individual selection of bitmap screens or custom text screens files for uploading or downloading. All of the associated files for both the end user created bitmap screens (Up to 121 files) and custom text screens (Up to 121 files) are either uploaded or downloaded from the WCC III – MCD with this single pull down menu selection of “Upload Slide Screen Files” or “Download Slide Screen Files”. 3-108 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Bitmap Screens BITMAP SCREENS Bitmap Slide 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Bmptest Bmptest Bmptest Bmptest Bmptest Bmptest Bmptest Bmptest Bmptest Bmptest Bmptest Bmptest 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. Test 27 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. Test 50 Double click left button to start Slide Show Screen. While in Slide Show Screen, hit [CtrlU] to toggle update. Hit [Enter] to enter Edit Mode. Hit [Enter] to add a new logic address. Hit [CtrlF] to find nearest logic address. Hit [CtrlD] to delete a logic address. HOME for menu The Bitmap Screen program is available as part of the standard software package. The Bitmap Screen program allows you to capture graphic screens that have been saved in a Windows bitmap format (BMP). The actual dynamic value of points within the WCC III system can then be placed on these screens. Up to 60 screens can be created, and up to 100 points (temperatures, ON/OFF status, etc.) can be placed on the screen. WCC III Technical Guide You first need to create a graphic file with a bmp extension. We recommend using PC Paint. PC Paint creates and edits drawings and displays and edits scanned photos. You can perform a print screen and save it in Paint with a bmp extension. Paint is located in the Accessories folder that comes with your Windows program. To access Paint, click <Start>, <All Programs>, <Accessories>, <Paint>. The file you create needs to be saved or copied to the same directory or sub-directory as the WCC III software. This is usually C:\ProgramFiles\WCC III\wcc3. 3-109 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Bitmap Screens Use the following procedure to cause the WCC III to read the file from the Bitmap Screen Program. Function of Keys While in Bitmap Screen + or PgUp Step forward one slide Step 1: From the WCC III Main Menu, highlight <Bitmap - or PgDn Step backward one slide Screens> and press <Enter>. Home or Esc or Ctrl+E Exit screen Step 2: Type the name of the file without the “bmp” extension Ctrl+U Toggle update and press <Enter>. In our example, the word “Bmptest 1” would be entered. Enter Enter edit logic address mode Enter or Ins Create logic address Step 3: The screen you created will appear in the Bitmap Slide Ctrl+D or Del Delete logic address Screen. Press <Enter> to enter Edit Mode. Home or Esc Press once to display point value after entering logic address; Press again to leave edit logic address mode + Change color Tab Next logic address Step 4: Press <Enter> again to place the values of points within the WCC III System on the screen. In other words, you can place an analog value such as temperature or pressure or a binary value such as fan status on the screen. Up to 100 values may be placed on the screen. <Ctrl-U> Toggle Updating The values of the points on the Bitmap Slide Screen are “dynamic.” That is, the values on the screen will change as the value of the point changes. However, you have the option of “freezing” the points at their present value by pressing <Ctrl> and <U> while the Bitmap Slide Screen is displayed on the monitor. To return to “live” data, press <Ctrl> and <U> again. Place Points on the Bitmap Slide Screen To place WCC III points on the Bitmap Slide Screen, first display the desired bitmap image on the screen. Wait for the cursor to appear in the upper left hand corner of the screen, and then press <Enter> once to allow you to use the arrow keys to move the cursor. When the cursor is at the place where you want the point value to be displayed, press <Enter> again, and the four slashes (////) will appear on the screen. Then, type the point designation and press <Enter>. For example, if you want the value from satellite #2 analog input #4, enter 2A4. Then press <Home>, and the point value will appear on the screen. Delete a Point Address on the Bitmap Slide Screen To delete a point on the Bitmap Slide Screen, first you must have the cursor in the exact location it was when the point was placed on the screen. To simplify finding this location, you may move the cursor near the existing point and then press <Ctrl> and <F> simultaneously to cause the cursor to move to the exact position where the point was created. You may delete the point by pressing <Ctrl> and <D> simultaneously, and then pressing <Enter>. The four slashes (////) will then appear. You may enter a new point, or to remove the slashes, leave the screen by pressing <Home> twice, and then re-access the screen. 3-110 Uploading and Downloading of User created Custom Screens and BitMap Screens. The WCC3.exe program version 2.27 and above has the ability to additionally store the end user created Custom Screens and BitMap Screens files on the WCC III – MCD. These stored files on the WCC III – MCD now include the WCC3.exe generated Custom Screens (Text Based) and BitMap screens (BMP pictures) and the associated data files. By uploading or sending of files to the WCC III – MCD, and by then by downloading or receiving files from the WCC III – MCD, it is now possible to synchronize all of these screens so that all of the WCC3 front end computer end users can now see and then use all of these files. This makes for easier distribution of the needed files for the WCC3 front end computer end users to better create and then keep track of, or updating of these WCC3 front end computer end user generated screen files. When the WCC3 front end computer end user creates a simple bitmap or custom text screen, these files are initially kept in the end users Windows based computer under the following subdirectory structure. C:Program Files\WCCIII\JobName subdirectory. (Please note that the JobName subdirectory is dependent on the Job Name that the end user has named his jobsite on the WCC3. exe “Access Job Site” menu on the initial Connection Dialog Box when starting the WCC3.exe program.) If there are more than one WCC3 front end computer end users then this is the mechanism that should now be used to synchronize all of the WCC3 front end computers end user created bitmap screens and custom text screens. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Bitmap Screens These end-user created bitmap screens can also be kept in the SlideFiles subdirectory in the Backtask subdirectory on the WCC III - MCD if they are uploaded to the WCC III - MCD, but please note that they are not part of the secure nightly and monthly backup of the WCC III - MCD data that occurs automatically every night and every month. Located at the very bottom of the right hand portion of the WCC3 screen there is a status bar that displays the status of the various files that are being uploaded or downloaded to the WCC III – MCD. After selecting the “Download Slide Screen Files” which causes the downloading of these files to the WCC3 user’s computer, you must then exit the WCC3.exe program, and then restart the WCC3. exe program to view these newly downloaded files. You can also verify that the uploading and downloading of these files has occurred with the System Event Log that is within the WCCUtilities.exe program. At the top of the WCC3.exe screen there is a pull down menu under “File” selection that has these two new options to either “Upload Slide Screen Files” or to “Download Slide Screen Files”. You must have level 3 access to “Upload Slide Screen Files” or to “Download Slide Screen Files” from the WCC III - MCD. Important reminder: “Upload Slide Screen Files” send files to the WCC III – MCD from the WCC3 user computer. “Download Slide Screen Files” receives files from the WCC III – MCD that goes to the WCC3 user computer. There is not an individual selection of bitmap screens or custom text screens files for uploading or downloading. All of the associated files for both the end user created bitmap screens (Up to 121 files) and custom text screens (Up to 121 files) are either uploaded or downloaded from the WCC III – MCD with this single pull down menu selection of “Upload Slide Screen Files” or “Download Slide Screen Files”. WCC III Technical Guide 3-111 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Network Information Screen NETWORK INFORMATION SCREEN Network Information Internal Static IP Address: External Static IP Address: Subnet Mask: Default Gateway: Primary DNS: Secondary DNS: SMPT Outgoing e-mail Server: SMPT Incoming e-mail Server: e-mail address: e-mail Password: 192.168.200.200 192.168.100.100 255.255.255.0 192.168.100.1 208.67.222.222 208.67.220.220 mail.wcc-controls.com [email protected] mcd@8500 Computer Name: Domain Name: Workgroup Name: DSL/Cable Provider Name: Telephone: Account #: User Name: User Password: Road Runner Mechanical Contractor Name: Telephone #: Telephone #: e-mail: IT Contract Name: Telephone #: e-mail: HOME for menu Use the Network Information Screen to store important and necessary information you might need to troubleshoot your system. A Level 0 to 3 user can view this screen, but only a Level 4 user can change any data. Please contact WattMaster Controls for this password. All of the information on this screen is entered by the installer of the WCC III system. External Static IP Address Address of the WCC III - MCD on the other side of the router. Internal Static IP Address Actual IP address of the WCC III - MCD. 3-112 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS PID Programs PID PROGRAM e(0): PID program stands for Proportional-Integral-Derivative control. e(1): There are many ways to calculate the PID formula. This PID program provides three ways to calculate the PID formula, the Simple PID Mode, the Digital PID Mode, and the Modified PID Mode. Simple PID Mode e(2): Kp: Ki: Kd: T: The current error between the Setpoint and Sampling value The last 1st between the Setpoint and Sampling input The last 2nd error between the Setpoint and Sampling value The Proportional Gain The Integrator Gain The Derivative Gain The sampling period (second) The Simple PID Mode calculates the PID formula based on the traditional PID equation as follows: P(0) I(0) D(0) U(0) = = = = Kp * e(0); I(1) + Ki * T * e(0); Kd * ( e(0) - e(1) ) / T; P(0) + I(0) + D(0) Where: U(0): P(0): I(0): D(0): e(0): Kp: The current calculated output value The current Proportional output The current Integrator output The current Derivative output The current error between the Setpoint and Sampling value The last Integrator output The last error between the Setpoint and Sampling value The Proportional Gain Ki: Kd: T: The Integrator Gain The Derivative Gain The sampling period (second) I(1): e(1): Digital PID Mode The Digital PID Mode calculates the PID formula based on the digitized PID equation as follows: U(0) = U(2) + Kp*( e(0)-e(2) ) + Ki*( e(0) + e(1) ) * T + Kd * ( e(0) - 2e(1) + e(2) ) / T Where: U(0): The current calculated output value U(2): The last 2nd calculated output value WCC III Technical Guide Modified PID Mode The Modified PID Mode calculates the PID formula based on the modified PID equation as follows: P(0) = K * ( b * ys-y(0) ) I(0) = I(1) + K*h*e(0)/Ti + h* ( U(1) - v(1) )/Tt D(0) = Td * D(1) / (Td+N*h) - K*N*Td * ( y(0) - y(1) ) / (Td+N*h ) U(0) = P(0) + I(0) + D(0) Where: ys: U(0) : U(1) : y(0): y(1): P(0): I(0): I(1): D(0): D(1): e(0): v(1): K: b: Ti: Tt: Td: N: h: The Setpoint The current calculated output value The last calculated output value The current sampling value The last sampling value The current Proportional output The current Integrator output The last Integrator output The current Derivative output The last Derivative output The current error between the Setpoint and Sampling value The last Winding amount The Gain The Proportional Fraction The Integrator Time The Reset Time The Derivative Time The Noise Factor The sampling period (second) 3-113 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS PID Programs Screen - SIMPLE SIMPLE PID PROGRAMS SCREEN Program Number: Activate By: This specifies which PID program it is. There are a total 16 PID programs. Sampling Period: This tells the PID program how to start. This has two parameters, the Active Logic Address and the Active Choice. The Active Choice can be <Only, Stop PID, Run PID>. If the <Only> choice is chosen, the PID program starts to run if the value of the Active Logic Address is 1. If the <Stop PID> choice is chosen, the PID program will not run regardless of the Active Logic Address. If the <Run PID> choice is chosen, the PID program will run regardless of the Active Logic Address. This tells the PID program how often to run this PID program. Sampling period is based on seconds. Current Active State: Sampling From: This shows the current Active By status which can be <On> or <Off>. This tells the PID program where to get the sampling from. This has to be an analog logic address. Output To Global Analog: Description: This gives a brief description of this program. Current Sampling: This shows the current sampling value from the logic address specified by “Sampling From.” Setpoint: This tells the PID program the control target. 3-114 This tells the PID program where to send its calculated output value. The PID program can only send its calculated output value to Global Analog which has to be set to <External> mode in order to receive value from the PID program. Current Output: This shows the current output value calculated by this PID program. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS PID Programs Screen PID Mode: This tells the PID program to run one of the three supported formulas. Simple PID Mode Proportional Gain: Current State: This defines the Proportional Gain of the simple PID formula. This shows the current PID state which can be <Idle>, <Running> or <Tuning>. Integrator Gain: This defines the Integrator Gain of the simple PID formula. Maximum Output: This limits the maximum output value this PID program can produce. Derivative Gain: This defines the Derivative Gain of the simple PID formula. Minimum Output: Maximum Integrator Value: This limits the Minimum output value this PID program can produce. This defines the absolute maximum the Integrator Value can be. Default Output: This tells the PID program the default output value when this PID program is not activated. RESET: This commands the PID program to reset its state to <Idle>. TUNING: This commands the PID program to <Tuning> state. USE TUNED DATA This commands the PID program to use the tuned parameters as the three PID parameters. WCC III Technical Guide Maximum Derivative Value: This defines the absolute maximum the Derivative Value can be. Current Proportional: This shows the current Proportional portion of the output. Current Integrator: This shows the current Integral portion of the output. Current Derivative: This shows the current Derivative portion of the output. Current Error: This shows the current error between the Setpoint and Sampling value. 3-115 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Modified PID Programs Screen MODIFIED PID PROGRAMS SCREEN Modified PID Mode USE DEFAULT MODIFIER Proportional Gain: This commands the WCC3 to set the Proportional Setpoint Factor, Anti-Winding Time, and Noise Factor to the default value. This defines the Proportional Gain of the modified PID formula. Integrator Time: This defines the Integrator Time of the modified PID formula. Derivative Time: This defines the Derivative Time of the modified PID formula. Maximum Integrator Value: This defines the absolute maximum the Integrator Value can be. Maximum Derivative Value: This defines the absolute maximum the Derivative Value can be. Proportional Setpoint Factor: This defines the Proportional Setpoint Factor of the modified PID formula. Anti-Winding Time: This defines the Anti-Winding Time of the modified PID formula. Current Proportional: This shows the current Proportional portion of the output. Current Integrator: This shows the current Integral portion of the output. Current Derivative: This shows the current Derivative portion of the output. Current Output: This shows the current output value. Current Sampling: This shows the current sampling value. Current Output: This shows the current calculated output value before the limit is adjusted. Noise Factor: This defines the Noise Factor of the modified PID formula. 3-116 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Digital PID Programs Screen DIGITAL PID PROGRAMS SCREEN Digital PID Mode Proportional Gain: This defines the Proportional Gain of the digital PID formula. Integrator Gain: This defines the Integrator Gain of the digital PID formula. Current Error: This shows the current error between the Setpoint and Sampling value. Previous Error: This shows the previous error between the Setpoint and Sampling value. Derivative Gain: This defines the Derivative Gain of the digital PID formula. Current Output: This shows the current output value. Previous Output: This shows the previous output value. WCC III Technical Guide 3-117 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS PID Tuning Screen TUNING PID PROGRAMS SCREEN The purpose of PID tuning is to find out the intrinsic characteristics of the system—the Ultimate Gain and System Period—in order to set the three PID parameters—Proportional Gain, Integrator Time, and Derivative Time. The tuning method used by this PID program is called Relay Tuning. Before the tuning can be started, the tuner must have some basic knowledge of the system so that the tuning process will not throw the system into an unstable state. The tuner must also know the safety range of the output value and the estimated delay time of system that can be obtained by observation of a simple experiment. During the tuning, the system has to be kept stable without other dynamic change. The tuner should know the physical output range of the system, otherwise the tuning would have no meaning. Output Delay: This tells the PID program how much time is needed for the sampling value to change after a change is made to the output. 3-118 Output Stable Time: This tells the PID program how much time is needed for the sampling value to become stable without a change being made to the output. Tuning Output Setpoint: This tells the PID program what is the safe output value without producing an uncomfortable result. This parameter can be set as the middle of the safety range of the output value. Source Setpoint: This shows the sampling source value for the output value set to be <Tuning Output Setpoint>. Tuning Amplitude: This tells the PID program how much change should be made to the output value. This parameter can be set as five to ten percent of the safety range of the output value. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS PID Tuning Screen Source Stable Hysteresis: Stable Time: This tells the PID program how much range the source sample stays in to consider the source sample as stable. For tuning temperature, one degree is a good value. This shows how long the sampling value has been considered stable. Source Crossing Hysteresis: Period Time: This shows the estimated period of the current tuning cycle. This tells the PID program how much beyond the <Source Setpoint> to be considered crossing the <Source Setpoint> Tuning Direction: Total Cycle: This shows the direction of the tuning process. The direction can be <Rise> or <Drop>. This shows the number of tuning cycles that have occurred. At least four cycles are needed to get enough tuning data to produce reasonable PID parameters. Output Timing: Source Peak Value: This shows the output is considered <In Delay> or <Not In Delay>. This shows the current peak value of the sampling source. State Time: This shows how long the tuning stage has been in its current state. WCC III Technical Guide 3-119 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Week Schedule Summary Screen Week Schedule Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is Wnn, where W = Week Schedule and nn = Week Schedule # WEEK SCHEDULE SUMMARY SCREEN Week Schedule Summary Description W1 : *Optimal Start* W2 : Linux Week Schedule W3 : Linux Week Schedule W4 : Linux Week Schedule W5 : Linux Week Schedule W6 : Linux Week Schedule W7 : Linux Week Schedule W8 : Linux Week Schedule W9 : Linux Week Schedule W10: Linux Week Schedule W11: Linux Week Schedule W12: Linux Week Schedule W13: Linux Week Schedule W14: Linux Week Schedule W15: Linux Week Schedule W16: Linux Week Schedule W17: Linux Week Schedule W18: Linux Week Schedule W19: Linux Week Schedule W20: Linux Week Schedule HOME for menu W 1 State DAY DAY DAY DAY DAY DAY DAY DAY DAY DAY DAY DAY DAY DAY DAY DAY DAY DAY DAY DAY ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON S1 S22 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19 S20 S2 S42 S23 S24 S25 S26 S27 S28 S29 S30 S31 S32 S33 S34 S35 S36 S37 S38 S39 S40 Time Date 08:23 1/21 Used by Optimals S3 S4 S5 S6 S62 S63 S43 S64 S44 S45 S46 S47 S48 S49 S50 S51 S52 S53 S54 S55 S56 S57 S58 S59 S60 Week Schedule Summary W_____ State Specifies the number of the first week schedule to be displayed on the Summary Screen. The system can display summary information for 20 schedules at one time. There are two messages which appear under this heading. The first one is the On/Off message the user enters on the Week Schedule Screen. The second message is the current status of the week schedule. To view or edit a specific week schedule, simply use the arrow keys to position the cursor (shown as “>” along the left hand side of the screen) to the desired point and press <Enter>. The week schedule for the specified point will now appear. Time Date The present time and date will automatically appear at these locations. Description: ____________ The description message which was entered on the Week Schedule Screen is displayed here to aid you in identifying the individual week schedules within the system. 3-120 Used by Optimals The optimal start programs within this system are based on week schedules. That is to say, the optimal start programs will automatically start the heating and air conditioning equipment at the latest possible moment each morning and yet have the space at the desired temperature level when a week schedule goes “ON.” The optimal start programs within the system that are based on the particular week schedule will be shown next to that week schedule. There are 128 week schedules with up to 6 On/Off schedules per day. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Week Schedule Screen Week Schedule Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is Wnn, where W = Week Schedule and nn = Week Schedule # WEEK SCHEDULE SCREEN -------------Week Schedule 1------------Description: Linux Week Schedule Current Status DAY ON On Message #: Off Message #: 7 8 DAY NIGHT WED 0824 Password level req’d to alter: 3 DAY EVENT EVENT EVENT EVENT EVENT EVENT ----------------------------------------------------------------------MON On 0800 Off 1700 --------TUE On 0800 Off 1700 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------WED On 0700 Off 1700 --------THUR On 0700 Off 1700 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------FRI On 0700 Off 1700 --------SAT On 1000 Off 1400 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------SUN Off 0000 ----------HOL Off 1000 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------HOME for menu WEEK SCHEDULE _____ Specifies the number of the week schedule which you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different week schedule, simply position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired week schedule number, and press <Enter>. There are 128 week schedules within the WCC III system to choose from. Description: ______________ Specifies a short textual message which is displayed on Summary and Data Entry/Editing Screens to aid you in remembering points within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allows). Current status ______ Displays the current status (ON or OFF) of this week schedule and current day of week, Mon to Sun and Holidays. On Message #:___ Off Message #: ___ to a message on the On/Off Message Screen. The message is then displayed in association with this week schedule. Password level req’d. to alter: ____ Specifies the minimum priority level required by the system to either allow you to make changes to the existing week schedule or enter a new one. This priority level corresponds directly to the priority level assigned each operator. Event Entry You may specify up to six events per day. Each event requires an event type and time. The event time is in a 24-hour format, and the event type is a choice list. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <OFF, ON, -- > Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Specifies a pair of message numbers, the first for the ON schedule and the second for the OFF schedule state. These numbers correspond WCC III Technical Guide 3-121 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Optimal Start Screen Optimal Start Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is Snn, where S = Optimal Start and nn = Optimal Start # OPTIMAL START SCREEN Optimal Start # 7 ON Time Date 08:26 1/21 GA3 44.0 Deg F Based on schedule: W1 ON Outdoor Sensor: Description: Linux Optimal Start Mode: Locked Indoor Sensor: GA2 65.0 Deg F Status: Heat Start Cooling Target: 74.0 Deg F Reason: Normal Heating Target: 70.0 Deg F Last start occurred at 07:35 on 11/21 Cold Soak Time Limit: 1440 Minutes with Outdoor = 44.0 Deg F Cold Soak Factor: 1.00 with Indoor = 65.0 Deg F Current Cold Soak Time: 0 Minutes Last start completed Within normal tolerance COOLING HEATING Outdoor Advance Outdoor Advance Advance time is measured in reading time reading time in minutes/1.0 Deg F ---------------------------- --------difference between indoor 80.0 Deg F 20.00 55.0 Deg F 5.00 and target temperatures. 75.7 Deg F 18.00 45.7 Deg F 5.00 71.4 Deg F 16.00 36.4 Deg F 5.00 Minutes to be on: 0 Minute 67.1 Deg F 14.00 27.1 Deg F 5.00 Run time: 55 Minutes 62.8 Deg F 12.00 17.8 Deg F 14.00 Advance Time: 25 Minutes 58.5 Deg F 10.00 8.5 Deg F 16.00 Demand: 5.0 Deg F 54.2 Deg F 8.00 -0.7 Deg F 18.00 50.0 Deg F 6.00 -10.0 Deg F 20.00 HOME for menu OPTIMAL START #_____ BASED ON SCHEDULE: Specifies the number of the optimal start program you are currently editing. The WCC III will accept up to 64 optimal start programs. Specifies the time period for which the building is to be at the “ON” schedule temperature. For example, if the user enters W1 (week schedule #1), and W1 is “ON” from 8:00 am to 5:00 pm, then the WCC III system will start the equipment early enough in the morning to have the space temperature at the target temperature when the occupants arrive at 8:00 am. The optimal start programs are referred to as S1 to S64. If a piece of equipment is to be optimally started, then Sn (n being a number from 1 to 64) is used for the schedule on the Control Output Screen for that piece of equipment. If the week schedule that the optimal start program is based on is input as the schedule for the control output, the control output will not operate based on the optimal start schedule. The Sn designation must be used to utilize the optimal start program. The Sn designation may be input directly in the Control Output Screen or used in a binary global. Description: A short message is entered here which is displayed on the Optimal Start Screens to help you remember points within the system. You may enter up to 20 characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed). Time / Date The present time and date will automaticaly appear at these location. 3-122 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Optimal Start Screen OUTDOOR SENSOR INDOOR SENSOR: Specifies the location of the indoor and outdoor temperature sensors to be used with this optimal start program. For example, if the outdoor air temperature sensor is wired to analog input A3 on satellite number 1, 1A3 may be input for the outdoor air sensor. Or, you may want to use a global analog which would allow you to average or sort the temperature of several zones for the indoor sensor. Cool Start: Heat Start: The Optimal Start program is in effect at the moment and is either initiating a COOL START or a HEAT START. REASON: Done On Time: The space temperature was at target temperature within 5 minutes of when the week schedule went on. Done Early: The space temperature was at target temperature more than 5 minutes before the week schedule went on. Done Late: MODE: Specifies the mode to be used. Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the page. <Locked, Adaptive, Disabled> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. The space temperature was at target temperature more than 5 minutes after the week schedule went on. COOLING TARGET: _____ °F HEATING TARGET: _____ °F Specifies the desired temperature to be maintained in the space by the time the schedule associated with the optimal start goes on. The system will use the advanced time variable specified by the user and will not adjust these values. The cooling target temperature MUST be greater than the heating target temperature. Also, the cooling target temperature must be greater than or equal to the ON schedule setpoint of the zone in question, and the heating target temperature must be less than or equal to the ON schedule setpoint of the zone in question. Adaptive: LAST START OCCURRED AT _____ ON _____ Locked: The system will automatically adjust the advance start time based on previous system performance. This allows the WCC III system to “fine tune” the morning start time so your building is at the target temperature when the schedule it has been assigned to goes ON. Disabled: The optimal start will be disabled when this choice has been selected. The optimal start will have no effect and the value input for the “based on schedule” category of this optimal start will provide the on/off schedule for the equipment. STATUS: The Optimal Start Screen will automatically display one of the four messages below: Status: <OFF, ON SCHEDULE, COOL START, HEAT START> The messages correspond with the following descriptions below: Off: The Optimal Start program is not in effect at the moment. On Schedule: The Optimal Start program is not in effect at the moment, but the schedule which is assigned to the Optimal Start is in the “ON” mode. WCC III Technical Guide The system will automatically fill in the time and date of the last start. This permits the user to check the system during the day to observe when the Optimal Start Program began. A Change of State Trend Log may also be used to log the start and stop time of the Optimal Start. To use the Change of State Trend Log, record the change of state for Sn (n being a number from 1 to 64 which corresponds to the optimal start in question). WITH OUTDOOR AND INDOOR = = When the last start occurred, the Outdoor and Indoor temperatures at the time of the start will automatically be recorded and displayed. This will aid you in monitoring the Optimal Start Programs for your system. LAST START COMPLETED <REQUIRED MAJOR ADJUSTMENT> Locked Mode The “required major adjustment” message will appear when the Optimal Start Screen is in the “locked mode” if the space temperature did not reach target temperature within 2 minutes of when the week schedule for this screen went ON. 3-123 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Optimal Start Screen Adaptive Mode COOLING/HEATING ADVANCE TIME The “required major adjustment” message will appear when the Optimal Start Screen is in the “adaptive mode” if the target temperature was not reached within the number of minutes equal to the difference between the actual temperature and target temperature when the optimal start began. That is, if there was a 10 °F difference between the actual temperature and the target temperature when the Optimal Start Program began, then the “required major adjustment” message will appear if the space temperature did not reach target temperature within 10 minutes of when the week schedule went ON. This is a user-entered field which corresponds with the Outdoor reading. These values also correspond with the message to its right which states: There are 64 optimal start schedules. Each one has a heating target and a cooling target. LAST START COMPLETED <WITHIN NORMAL TOLERANCE> Locked Mode The “within normal tolerance” message will appear when the Optimal Start Screen is in the locked mode when the space temperature reaches the target temperature within 2 minutes of when the week schedule for this screen goes ON. Adaptive Mode The “within normal tolerance” message will appear when the Optimal Start Screen is in the “adaptive mode” if the space temperature reaches the target temperature within the number of minutes equal to the difference between the actual temperature and target temperature when the optimal start began. That is, if there was a 10 °F difference between the actual temperature and the target temperature when the Optimal Start Program began, then the “within normal tolerance” message will appear if the space temperature was at the target temperature within 10 minutes of when the week schedule went ON. COOLING/HEATING OUTDOOR READING Enter two values under the outdoor reading heading—the top value and the bottom value. The computer automatically fills in the values between these two numbers at even increments. Usually, the highest outdoor air temperature expected is input at the top, and the lowest outdoor air temperature expected is input at the bottom. Advance time is measured in minutes/1.0 Deg F difference between indoor and target temperatures. Minutes to be on: 0 Minute Run Time: 0 Minute Advance Time: 92 Minute Demand: 5.0 Deg F In the LOCKED mode, the system will always use these advance start times. In the ADAPTIVE mode, the system will automatically adjust these values based on previous system performance. The Optimal Start Program reads the indoor temperature and calculates how far it is away from the target temperature. It also reads the outdoor temperature and then determines the start time needed to bring the building to the target temperature. The largest number which may be entered in this position is 99.99. For example, assume the outdoor temperature is 45 ºF, the indoor temperature is 65 ºF, and the indoor target temperature is 70 ºF. Outdoor Temperature: Indoor Temperature : Target Temperature : 45 ºF 65 ºF 70 ºF From the Advance Start Table, the advance start time is 12.11 minutes per ºF. The difference between the indoor and target temperatures is 5 ºF. Target Temperature: Indoor Temperature: Difference: 70 ºF 65 ºF ----------5 ºF Therefore, the advance start time is 60.55 minutes. 12.11 x 5 = 60.55 MINUTES EARLY START If you have selected the “adaptive” mode, and the space temperature does not reach the target temperature when the schedule associated with this optimal start program goes ON, the system will automatically increase the advance start time. If the space reaches the indoor target temperature before the schedule goes ON, then the system will automatically reduce the advance start time. 3-124 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Globals ANALOG GLOBALS The WCC III system has 256 analog globals. The term “analog” means a numerical value represented by a directly measurable quantity such as temperature, pressure, etc. The term “global” means information which is shared by all of the satellite controllers in the system. Therefore, an “analog global” is a numerical value which can be used by any satellite controller within the WCC III system. WCC III Logical Addressing GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog, XXX = Global Analog Address A WCC III system has the capability of generating the value of the analog globals by the following methods: • • Averaging several numerical values Sorting several numerical values to find the highest number, lowest number, or any number in between • • • Calculating a “sliding window” average Averaging one value over a period of time Add data readings together to obtain an accumulated total • • • • • • • • Math functions Look up tables External mode Dual Valve Proportion Dual Ramp Multi-Proportion Pulse Start WCC III Technical Guide 3-125 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Summary Screen Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address ANALOG GLOBAL SUMMARY SCREEN ANALOG Global Summary GA1 : GA2 : GA3 : GA4 : GA5 : GA6 : GA7 : GA8 : GA9 : GA10: GA11: GA12: GA13: GA14: GA15: GA16: GA17: GA18: Description Linux Primary Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global GA 1 Value 55.0 Deg 65.0 Deg 44.0 Deg 55.0 Deg 66.0 Deg 55.0 Deg 55.0 Deg 55.0 Deg 55.0 Deg 1.0 Deg 999.9 Deg 55.0 Deg 55.0 Deg 55.0 Deg 99.0 Deg 55.0 Deg 55.0 Deg 55.0 Deg F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F Alarm 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 Time 8:38 Alarm Time Limits 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 Date 1/21 15:40 01/16 15:40 01/16 15:40 01/16 ANALOG Value Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: The present value of the global analog is displayed on the screen at this location. <ANALOG, BINARY> To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired summary type has been selected and then press <Enter>. (If you select a summary type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen information.) To view or edit a specific analog global, use the arrow keys to position the cursor (shown as “>” along the left-hand side of the screen) to the desired point and press <Enter>. The Analog Global Screen for the specified point will now appear. Time / Date The present time and date will automatically appear at these locations. Description Alarm Limits Alarm Time The alarm limits for the global analog are shown here along with the time that the alarm occurred. However, if a global alarm is active, the alarm class will appear on the Main Menu after the “Active alarms in classes:” statement. The alarm will also show on the Alarm Summary Screen. Acknowledge Alarms The global analog alarms are acknowledged from the Global Analog Summary Screen by moving the cursor to the active alarm and selecting <Action> from the Top Menu Bar and then selecting <Acknowledge Alarm>. If the global analog value is within the alarm limits, the alarm message will be cleared from the screen. It can take up to 30 seconds before the alarm is cleared from the screen. The description message which was entered on the Analog Global Screen is displayed here to aid you in identifying the different analog globals within the screen. 3-126 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Screen Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address ANALOG GLOBAL SCREEN ANALOG Global #: 20 Description: Example name is Data Pattern: Unit of Measure: 2 In Local Set this global defaults to LAST value. Mode 4: GA 20 xxx.x Math Function Global Value = 1a2 If this function cannot be calculated successfully, then use 65.0 -------------------------------------ALARM---------------------------------Range Low Limit High Limit Type Message # Message None ------0 0 Analog Global #:____ Data Pattern: _____ Specifies the global number and its type. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Specifies the number of significant digits for analog global values displayed by the system. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ANALOG, BINARY> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired global type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (If you select a global type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen information.) <x,xxx, xxx.x, xx.xx, x.xxx> Units of Measure: If you would like to edit a different global, simply position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, entering the desired global number, and pressing <Enter>. Specifies a message number to be used throughout the system to reference a textual message which is displayed with the values associated with this global. For example, if units of measure message #4 is Deg F, and the units of measure message for the specific analog global is degrees Fahrenheit, then the units of measure would be 4. name is ______ In Local Set this global defaults to Specifies the name (point address) of this analog global. Any changes to the global number will be reflected in this point address (e.g., ANALOG GLOBAL #: 28 would show GA 28 as the name). Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Description: ________________ Specifies a short message which is displayed on Summary and Data Entry/Editing Screens to aid you in remembering points within the system. You may enter up to 20 characters (control, codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed). WCC III Technical Guide <LAST, FIXED> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired default choice has been selected, and then press <Enter>. 3-127 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Screen The term local set means that communication is lost between the MCD and the satellite controllers. If the MCD stops communicating, the global analog values will be gone. This input allows you to specify a default value for the global analog if the MCD quits communicating. You may input a fixed number, or you may choose to select LAST VALUE. If LAST VALUE is chosen, the global analog will default to the value it had when communications with the MCD were lost. CAUTION: Select the mode before entering any other data on an Analog Global Screen. If other information is entered before the mode is selected, there is a chance that the global analog will not perform properly. If data has already been entered and you want to change the mode, you must first clear the screen by using the <Ctrl><Home> feature, and then exit to the Global Analog Summary Screen before re-entering data. Mode Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Averaged, Sorted, Integral, Math, Look Up, External, Dual Valve, Proportion, Dual Ramp, Multi-Proportion, Pulse Start> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. One of the following screens will appear, depending on which choice you select: Averaged List Sorted List Integral Sliding Window Average Accumulation 3-128 Math Function Look-Up Table External Dual Valve Proportion Dual Ramp Multi-Proportion Pulse Start WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Averaged List Screen Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address ANALOG GLOBAL - AVERAGED LIST ANALOG GLOBAL #: _20 Description: name is GA 20 Example Data Pattern: xxx.x Unit of Measure: 1 In Local Set this global defaults to LAST value. Mode 1: Value to be averaged 1A1 1A2 1A3 ---- ---- Averaged List ---- ---- Substitute 72.000 for each unavailable value until more than 3 are available, then use 70.0 as the value for this global. Range None Low Limit ---- HOME for menu --------------- ALARM --------------High Limit Type Message # ---0 0 ---values Message < Average, Sorted, Integra, Math fu, Lookup, External > Mode 1: Averaged List Value to be averaged You may input up to 8 analog values to be averaged. The values may be input in the form of 12A4 (analog input #4 on satellite controller #12) or GA20 (global analog #20). If a satellite controller that has an analog input used on this screen stops communicating, then a value will be missing from the list. The statement at the bottom of the screen allows you to specify a default value for the missing values. However, if several inputs are missing, you may default to a fixed value. Consider the following example: Substitute 72 for each unavailable value until more than 3 values are unavailable, and then use 70 as the value for this global. If one analog input on this screen is lost, then 72 will be substituted for the lost value. If more than 3 analog input values are missing from this screen, the value of the global will default to 70. Range The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range. If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is outside the limits specified. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of WCC III Technical Guide available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <None, Inside, Outside> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected, and then pressing <Enter>. Low Limit High limit The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value. When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar> until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>. If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a number which will serve as the alarm limit. If you select “Address,” you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog to be used as the alarm limit. Type Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) Message # Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen. 3-129 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Sorted List Screen Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address ANALOG GLOBAL - SORTED LIST ANALOG Global #:__2 Description: name is GA Sorted 3 Data Pattern: xxx.x Unit of Measure: 1 In Local Set this global defaults to LAST value of: 74 Mode 2: Value to be sorted 1A2 1A3 1A4 1A5 1A6 Sorted List ---- ---- ---- List will be ordered from lowest of above values to highest. Lowest element will be number 1. Highest will be number n. Global value = sorted list element #: 3 If more than 0 values are unavailable then use 0.0 as the value for this global. Range Inside Low Limit 0.0 HOME for menu ---------------ALARM--------------High Limit Type Message # 0.0 0 0 < Average, Sorted, Integra, Math fu, Lookup, External > Mode 2: Sorted List 1 ---70 Values to be sorted You may input up to 8 analog values to be sorted. The values may be input in the form of 12A4 (analog input #4 on satellite controller #12) or GA20 (global analog #20). The values of the analog inputs on this screen will be sorted from the lowest to the highest. For example, assume that the following analog inputs have been entered on this screen as values to be sorted: 5A4 7A6 22A1 Message 13A3 _____ _____ _____ ____ Assume: The value of analog input #4 on satellite #5 (5A4) = The value of analog input #6 on satellite #7 (7A6) = The value of analog input #1 on satellite #22 (22A1) The value of analog input #3 on satellite #13 (13A3) 76 º F 72 º F = 70 º F = 74 º F The system will order the values from the lowest to the highest as shown below: 2 ---72 3 ---74 4 ---76 You may designate the value of this global to be any of these four values. Let’s assume that we want the value of this global to be the next from the highest of the sorted values. Therefore we would input a 3 for the sorted list element #. Global value = sorted list element #: 3 The value of the global analog would be 74 in this example since 74 is number 3 in the ordered list. If a satellite controller which has an analog input used on this screen stops communicating, a value will be missing from the list. The statement at the bottom of the screen allows you to specify a default value. If several inputs are missing, you may default to a fixed value. Consider the following example: If more than 3 values are unavailable, then use 74 as the value for this global. If more than 3 inputs are lost, the global will no longer sort the list, but default to 74. 3-130 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Sorted List Screen and Integral Mode Range The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range. If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is outside the limits specified. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <None, Inside, Outside> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected, and then pressing <Enter>. Low Limit High limit The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value. When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar> until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>. If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a number which will serve as the alarm limit. If you select “Address,” you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog to be used as the alarm limit. Type Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) Message # Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen. ANALOG GLOBAL - INTEGRAL MODE Mode 3: Integral The integral mode can be used to either determine the average value of a measured variable using a “sliding window” effect or the straight average for a given time period. The integral may also be used to add data readings together to obtain an accumulated total. ACCUMULATION MODE The integral mode may also be used to add data readings together to obtain an accumulated total. For example, assume that the WCC III system is monitoring the gallons per minute (gpm) of fuel oil used by a building. We can use the integral mode to take a sample gpm reading every minute and accumulate the readings to obtain a total gallons used each day. For example, consider the following table of data: Time (minutes since midnight) Sample Reading (gpm) Value of the Global Analog (total gallons) 1 5 5 2 6 11 3 5 16 4 4 20 1439 5 7200 At the end of the day, the total gallons used (7200 in the above example) can be automatically written on a Trend Log Screen. After the value is saved on a Trend Log Screen, the total gallons used can be reset to 0 to allow the system to start accumulating the next day’s oil usage. The screen on the next page is a Global Analog Screen using the accumulation mode to total the gallons of fuel oil used. WCC III Technical Guide 3-131 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Integral Mode Accumulation Mode Screen Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address GLOBAL ANALOG - INTEGRAL MODE ACCUMULATION MODE SCREEN ANALOG Global #: Description: Integral 32 Name is GA32 Data Pattern: xxx.x Unit of Measure: 7 Gal In Local Set this global defaults to LAST VALUE Mode 3: Sampling from : 1A2 Sampling rate: 1 Minutes Mode: Accumulation Global value = Integral Automatic Reset by ..... being ON Window: 24 Hours Divisor: 1 i = n ( Di/n) / divisor i = 1 If sampling data is unavailable, then use 50 as default value Range None Low Limit ---------------Alarm--------------High Limit Type Message # Message Reset random data by pressing <Ctrl> <R> after editing. HOME for menu Sampling From: The value of the global analog will be the accumulated total of this input over the specified time period. For example, if GA20 is input here, the system will periodically read the value of analog global #20. The value of the global analog will be the accumulated total of the readings over the specified time period. Automatically reset by GB1 being ON This allows you to have the system automatically restart the accumulation cycle when a binary value goes either ON or OFF. Because this second field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Sampling Rate: 1 Minutes Window: 24 Hours Assume we are monitoring fuel oil usage in gpm, and 1 minute is entered as the sampling rate and 24 hours is entered for the Window. The system will read the value of the fuel oil usage rate (gpm) every minute and then add the current value to the accumulated total until 24 hours have elapsed. After 24 hours, the calculation process will start over. The sampling rate can vary from 1 minute to 99 hours. The window will accept from 0-999 minutes, hours, days, or samples. <OFF, ON> 3-132 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Integral Mode Accumulation Mode Screen The sampling rate programmed amount of time can be in minutes or hours. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Minutes, Hours> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired time frame has been selected, and then press <Enter>. The sampling rate window can be programmed for number of minutes, hours, days, or samples. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Minutes, Hours, Days, Samples> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired time frame has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Integral Mode: Accumulation There are three integral modes which can be selected by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. The following choices are available: < Accumulation, Average, Sliding Window > Divisor: 1 Due to memory limitations within the WCC III system, the maximum value of any global analog is 65,535, and the largest number which can be displayed on the screen is 9999. The value of the global analog is divided by this number to lower the number shown on the screen. The maximum divisor allowed is 9999. i=n Global value = ( Di / n ) / divisor i=1 This is simply the form of the math equation used to generate the value of this global analog. If sampling data is unavailable, use 50 as the default value. If the input value is not available or invalid, then the value of this global analog will default to this number. WCC III Technical Guide Range The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range. If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is outside the limits specified. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <None, Inside, Outside> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected, and then pressing <Enter>. Low Limit High limit The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value. When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar> until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>. If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a number which will serve as the alarm limit. If you select “Address,” you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog to be used as the alarm limit. Type Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) Message # Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen. Reset random data by pressing Ctrl-R After you enter data on this screen, or after you make any changes to the screen, you should reset the data. You can do this in one of two ways when the cursor is at the Home position of the screen. You can press <Ctrl><R> or you can select <Action> from the Top Menu Bar and then select <Reset>. You may also use the reset feature whenever you want to cause the calculation process to start over. 3-133 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Integral Mode Average Mode ANALOG GLOBAL - INTEGRAL MODE AVERAGE MODE The integral mode can be used to obtain an average value for a measured variable over a given time period. For example, this can be used to obtain the average outside air temperature for a month. The WCC III system will take an outdoor air temperature reading at programmed time intervals, for example, 1 reading every minute. The value of the analog global will be the average temperature for all of the readings taken since this mode was started. To understand this mode better, think of the data as being in a “window” which moves along the time axis and has all of the outside air temperature readings in it since the beginning of the month. The value of the analog global is the average of all the temperature readings that are in the window. As the next temperature reading becomes available, the window increases in size until the value of the analog global is automatically cleared or erased at the beginning of the month. 3-134 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Integral Mode Average Mode Screen Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address GLOBAL ANALOG - INTEGRAL MODE AVERAGE MODE SCREEN ANALOG Global #: Description: 30 AVG OA TEMP Name is GA30 Data Pattern: x,xxx Unit of Measure: 1 °F In Local Set this global defaults to LAST VALUE Mode 3: Sampling from : Sampling rate: Mode: Average Global value = 1A3 1 Minutes Integral Automatic Reset by GB1 being ON Window: 33 days Divisor: 1 i = n ( (Di/n ) / divisor i = 1 If sampling data is unavailable, then use 50 as default value Range None Low Limit ---------------Alarm--------------High Limit Type Message # Message Reset random data by pressing Ctrl-R after editing. HOME for menu Sampling From: The value of the global analog will be the average of this input over the specified time period. For example, if 1A3 is input here, the system will periodically read the value of analog input #3 on satellite controller #1. The value of the global analog will be the average of the readings over the specified time period. Automatically reset by GBXXX being ON This allows you to have the system automatically restart the averaging cycle when a global binary value goes either ON or OFF. Because this second field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <OFF, ON> WCC III Technical Guide Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Sampling Rate: 1 Minutes Window: 33 Days Assume we are monitoring outside air temperature and 1 minute is entered as the “sampling rate” and 33 days for the Window. The system will read the value of the outside air temperature every minute and then average the values until 33 days have elapsed. After 33 days the calculation process will start over. In the example above, GB1 goes on at the beginning of each new month to restart the averaging process, so the end of the window is never reached. If the end of the window is reached, the system will restart the calculation process. The sampling rate can vary from 1 minute to 99 hours. The window will accept from 0-9999 minutes, hours, days, or samples. 3-135 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Integral Mode Average Mode Screen The sampling rate programmed amount of time can be in minutes or hours. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Minutes, Hours> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired time frame has been selected, and then press <Enter>. The sampling rate window can be programmed for number of minutes, hours, days, or samples. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Minutes, Hours, Days, Samples> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired time frame has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Integral Mode: Average There are three integral modes which can be selected by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. The following choices are available: < Accumulation, Average, Sliding Window > Range The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range. If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is outside the limits specified. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <None, Inside, Outside> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected, and then pressing <Enter>. Low Limit High limit The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value. When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar> until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>. If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a number which will serve as the alarm limit. If you select “Address,” you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog to be used as the alarm limit. Type Divisor: 1 Due to memory limitations within the WCC III system, the maximum value of any global analog is 65,535, and the largest number which can be displayed on the screen is 9999. The value of the global analog is divided by this number to lower the number shown on the screen. The maximum divisor allowed is 9999. i=n Global value = ( Di / n ) / divisor i=1 This is simply the form of the math equation used to generate the value of this global analog. If sampling data is unavailable, use 50 as the default value. If the input value is not available or is invalid, the value of this global analog will default to this number. 3-136 Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) Message # Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen. Reset random data by pressing Ctrl-R After you enter data on this screen, or after you make any changes to the screen, you should reset the data. You can do this in one of two ways when the cursor is at the Home position of the screen. You can press <Ctrl><R> or you can select <Action> from the Top Menu Bar and then select <Reset>. You may also use the reset feature whenever you want to cause the calculation process to start over. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Integral Mode Sliding Window Mode Screen ANALOG GLOBAL - INTEGRAL MODE SLIDING WINDOW Assume that we want to know the average kW demand of a building over a 30 minute time period. The WCC III system will take a kW reading at programmed time intervals; for example, 1 reading every three minutes. The value of the analog global will be the average kW for the 10 most recent readings. To understand this mode better, think of the data as being in a “window” which moves along the time axis and has the 10 most recent kW readings in it. The value of the analog global is the average of the kW values that are in the window. As the next kW reading becomes available, the oldest kW reading in the window drops off and is no longer included in the data set which is used to determine the value of the global analog. WCC III Technical Guide 3-137 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Integral Mode Sliding Window Mode Screen Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address ANALOG GLOBAL - INTEGRAL MODE SLIDING WINDOW MODE SCREEN ANALOG Global #: Description: 30 Name is GA30 Building kW Data Pattern: x,xxx Unit of Measure: 4 kW In Local Set this global defaults to LAST value Mode 3: Sampling from : GA1 Sampling rate: 3 Minutes Mode: Sliding Window Integral Automatic Reset by GB1 being ON Window: 10 samples Divisor: 1 i = n Global value = ( Di/n) / divisor i = 1 If sampling data is unavailable, then use 50 as default value Range None Low Limit ---------------Alarm--------------High Limit Type Message # Message Reset random data by pressing Ctrl-R after editing. HOME for Menu Mode 3: Integral Sampling From: Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. The value of the global analog will be the average of this input using the sliding window averaging method. Sampling Rate: 3 Minutes For example, if 3A1 is input here, the system will periodically read the value of analog input #1 on satellite controller #3. The value of the global analog will be the average of several of the most recent readings, depending on how other inputs on this screen are filled out. Assume we are monitoring building kW, and 3 minutes is entered as the sampling rate, and 10 samples is entered for the Window. The system will read the value of the building kW every 3 minutes and then average the 10 most recent readings. The value of this global analog will be the average kW for the last 30 minutes. The maximum number of samples allowed is 11. Automatically reset by GB1 being OFF This allows you to have the system automatically restart the averaging cycle when a binary value goes either ON or OFF. Because this second field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <OFF, ON> 3-138 Window: 10 Samples The sampling rate programmed amount of time can be in minutes or hours. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Minutes, Hours> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired time frame has been selected, and then press <Enter>. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Integral Mode Sliding Window Mode Screen The sampling rate window can be programmed for number of minutes, hours, days, or samples. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Minutes, Hours, Days, Samples> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired time frame has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Range The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range. If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is outside the limits specified. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <None, Inside, Outside> Integral Mode: Sliding Window There are three integral modes which can be selected by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice appears, and then pressing <Enter>. The following choices are available: < Accumulation, Average, Sliding Window > Divisor: 1 Due to memory limitations within the WCC III system, the maximum value of any global analog is 65,535, and the largest number which can be displayed on the screen is 9999. The value of the global analog is divided by this number to lower the number shown on the screen. The maximum divisor allowed is 9999. i=n Global value = ( Di / n) / divisor i=1 This is simply the form of the math equation used to generate the value of this global analog. If sampling data is unavailable, use 50 as the default value. If the input value is not available or invalid, then the value of this global analog will default to this number. You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected, and then pressing <Enter>. Low Limit High limit The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value. When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar> until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>. If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a number which will serve as the alarm limit. If you select “Address,” you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog to be used as the alarm limit. Type Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) Message # Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen. Reset random data by pressing Ctrl-R After you enter data on this screen, or after you make any changes to the screen, you should reset the data. You can do this in one of two ways when the cursor is at the Home position of the screen. You can press <Ctrl><R> or you can select <Action> from the Top Menu Bar and then select <Reset>. You may also use the reset feature whenever you want to cause the calculation process to start over. WCC III Technical Guide 3-139 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Math Function Mode Screen Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address ANALOG GLOBAL - MATH FUNCTION MODE The Math Function mode allows the WCC III system to perform mathematical functions using global analog values. MATH FUNCTION SCREEN ANALOG Global #: 33 Name is GA33 Description: Linux Global Data Pattern: x,xxx Unit of Measure: 6% In Local Set this global defaults to LAST value Mode 4: Global Value = GA1 If this function cannot be calculated successfully, then use 50.0. Range Outside Low Limit 25.0 ---------------Alarm--------------High Limit Type Message # 75.0 1 6 Mode 4: Math Function Math Function Message Temp Out of Range Operator Comment Global Value = ((2A5-2A6)/(2A5-GA3))*100 Exponential (ex) exp(X) Yields the value of “e” raised to the power of the variable in parentheses The math formula to be calculated is entered here. The WCC III system has the following math functions: Remainder % Yields the remainder when the value at its left is divided by the value to its right (integers only) Arithmetic Functions Operator Add + Comment Adds the value at its right to the value at its left Trigonometric Functions Operator Comment Subtract - Subtracts the value at its right from the value at its left Sine Multiply * Multiples the value at its right by the value at its left Cosine cos(X) Yields the cosine of the value in parentheses Divide / Divides the value at its left by the value at its right Tangent tan(X) Yields the tangent of the value in parentheses Square Root sqrt(X) Yields the square root of the value in the parentheses Arc-sine asin(X) Yields the arc-sine of the value in parentheses Log (Base 10) log(X) Yields the log of the value in the parentheses Arc-cosine acos(X) Yields the arc-cosine of the value in parentheses Arc-Tangent atan(X) Yields the arc-tangent of the value in parentheses Exponential (Xy) Natural Log 3-140 pow(X,Y) Yields the value of the first variable (X) raised to the power of the second variable (Y) 1n(X) sin(X) Yields the sine of the value in parentheses Yields the natural log of the variable in the parentheses WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Math Function Mode Screen Relational Functions Operator Equal to Comment == The combined expression is true if the value to its left is equal to the value to its right; it is false otherwise Greater Than > The combined expression is true if the value to its left is greater than to the value to its right; it is false otherwise Greater Than or Equal to => The combined expression is true if the value to its left is greater than or equal to the value to its right; it is false otherwise Less Than < The combined expression is true if the value to its left is less than the value to its right; it is false otherwise Less Than or Equal to =< Unequal =! The combined expression is true if the value to its left is less than or equal to the value to its right; it is false otherwise The combined expression is true if the value to its left is not equal to the value on its right; it is false otherwise Logical Functions Logical “or” Operator Comment || The combined expression is true if the value to its left or the value to its right is true; it is false otherwise Logical “and” && The combined expression is true if the value to its left and the value to its right is true; it is false otherwise Logical “not” ! The expression is true if the value to its right is false, and vice versa Miscellaneous Functions Operator Conditional ?: Comment The conditional operator takes 3 expressions arranged as follows: (Return Air Temperature) - (Mixed Air Temperature) % OA = --------------------------------------------------------------x 100 (Return Air Temperature - Outside Air Temperature) Assume 2A5 (satellite controller #2, analog input #5) is the return air temperature, 2A6 is the mixed air temperature, and GA3 is the outside air temperature. The value of the global analog will be percent outside air. Global Value = ((2A5-2A6)/(2A5-GA3))*100 If the math function can’t be calculated successfully, then use 20. If the input value is not available or is invalid, then the value of this global analog will default to the number entered here. Range The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range. If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is outside the limits specified. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <None, Inside, Outside> You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected, and then pressing <Enter>. Low Limit High limit The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value. When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar> until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>. If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a number which will serve as the alarm limit. If you select “Address,” you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog to be used as the alarm limit. expression1 ? expression2 : expression 3 Type The conditional operator yields the value of expression2 if expression1 is true and yields the value of expression3 otherwise Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) As an example, assume that we want to calculate the percent outside air using the following formula: WCC III Technical Guide Message # Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen. 3-141 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Look Up Table Mode Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address ANALOG GLOBAL LOOK UP TABLE MODE Mode 5: Look Up Table Eight of the global analog screens (GA121-128) have a “look up table” available. The look up table generates an output number based on the value of an input number. This mode is very useful for curve fitting applications. For example, consider a non-linear temperature sensor that has the characteristics shown on the following graph: 1.0 Signal from Temperature Sensor (VDC) 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Actual Temperature (Deg F) This graph can be reconstructed within the WCC III system with the use of a look up table. For this example, assume that the 0-1 VDC signal from the sensor is connected to analog input 2A3 (Analog input #3 on satellite controller #2). The signal from the sensor is the Analog Input for the look up table, and the actual temperature is the value of global analog #121. 3-142 The data entered in the IN column must be in sequence with “1” being the smallest and “60” the largest. If the input data is less than the smallest value in the IN column, the smallest IN value on the screen is used. If the input is greater than the largest IN value, the largest IN value is used. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Look Up Table Mode Screen Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address ANALOG GLOBAL LOOK UP TABLE SCREEN ANALOG Global #: Description: Temperature 121 Name is GA121 Data Pattern: xxx.x Unit of Measure: 1 °F In Local Set this global defaults to LAST VALUE Map From: 2A3 Extend Data to Next Table?: NO Mode 5: Look Up Table If the input data is unavailable, then use 70 as default value IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT 1: 41 -> 41.5 16: 56 -> 59.5 31: 71 -> 68.0 2: 42 -> 42.5 17: 57 -> 60.3 32: 72 -> 68.5 3: 43 -> 44.5 18: 58 -> 61.0 33: 73 -> 69.0 4: 44 -> 46.5 19: 59 -> 61.5 34: 74 -> 69.5 5: 45 -> 47.5 20: 60 -> 62.0 35: 75 -> 70.0 6: 46 -> 49.0 21: 61 -> 62.5 36: 76 -> 70.6 7: 47 -> 51.5 22: 62 -> 63.0 37: 77 -> 71.3 8: 48 -> 51.8 23: 63 -> 63.5 38: 78 -> 72.0 9: 49 -> 53.0 24: 64 -> 64.0 39: 79 -> 72.5 10: 50 -> 54.0 25: 65 -> 64.8 40: 80 -> 73.0 11: 51 -> 55.0 26: 66 -> 65.5 41: 81 -> 74.0 12: 52 -> 56.3 27: 67 -> 66.0 42: 82 -> 74.5 13: 53 -> 57.0 28: 68 -> 66.3 43: 83 -> 75.3 14: 54 -> 58.0 29: 69 -> 67.0 44: 84 -> 76.0 15: 55 -> 59.0 30: 70 -> 67.3 45: 85 -> 77.0 IN OUT 46: 86 -> 78.0 47: 87 -> 78.7 48: 88 -> 79.7 49: 89 -> 80.7 50: 90 -> 81.7 51: 91 -> 83.0 52: 92 -> 84.0 53: 93 -> 85.3 54: 94 -> 86.5 55: 95 -> 88.0 56: 96 -> 89.5 57: 97 -> 91.0 58: 98 -> 93.0 59: 99 -> 95.5 60: 100 -> 100.0 HOME for menu Analog Global #:____ name is ______ Specifies the global number and its type. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Specifies the name (point address) of this analog global. Any changes to the global number will be reflected in this point address (e.g., ANALOG GLOBAL #: 28 would show GA 28 as the name). <ANALOG, BINARY> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired global type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (If you select a global type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen information.) Description: ________________ Specifies a short message which is displayed on Summary and Data Entry/Editing Screens to aid you in remembering points within the system. You may enter up to 20 characters (control, codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed). If you would like to edit a different global, simply position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, entering the desired global number, and pressing <Enter>. WCC III Technical Guide 3-143 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Look Up Table Mode Screen Data Pattern: _____ Map From: Specifies the number of significant digits for analog global values displayed by the system. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Specifies an analog point address that acts as the input signal source for the output valve. <x,xxx, xxx.x, xx.xx, x.xxx> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired default choice has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Units of Measure: Specifies a message number to be used throughout the system to reference a textual message which is displayed with the values associated with this global. For example, if units of measure message #4 is Deg F, and the units of measure message for the specific analog global is degrees Fahrenheit, then the units of measure would be 4. In Local Set this global defaults to Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: < LAST, FIXED > Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired default choice has been selected, and then press <Enter>. The term local set means that communication is lost between the MCD and the satellite controllers. If the MCD stops communicating, the global analog values will be gone. This input allows you to specify a default value for the global analog if the MCD quits communicating. You may input a fixed number, or you may choose to select LAST VALUE. If LAST VALUE is chosen, the global analog will default to the value it had when communications with the MCD were lost. Extend Data to next Table Each look up table can hold up to 60 sets of data. If you have an application which requires a larger look up table, the data may be extended to the next look up table. Mode Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Averaged, Sorted, Integral, Math, Look Up, External, Dual Valve, Proportion, Dual Ramp, Multi-Proportion, Pulse Start> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. One of the following screens will appear, depending on which choice you select: Averaged List Sorted List Integral Sliding Window Average Accumulation Math Function Look-Up Table External Dual Valve Proportion Dual Ramp Multi-Proportion Pulse Start CAUTION: Select the mode before entering any other data on an Analog Global Screen. If other information is entered before the mode is selected, there is a chance that the global analog will not perform properly. If data has already been entered and you want to change the mode, you must first clear the screen by using the <Ctrl><Home> feature, and then exit to the Global Analog Summary Screen before re-entering data. If the analog input is unavailable, then use 70.0 as a default value. If the input value is not available or invalid, then the value of this global analog will default to this number. 3-144 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Look Up Table Graph Graph <Action>, <Plot> Each look up table has a graph associated with it which can be displayed on the screen. To view the graph, select <Action> from the Top Menu Bar, and then select <Plot>. The graph for GA121 is shown below: WCC III Technical Guide 3-145 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global External Mode Screen Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address ANALOG GLOBAL EXTERNAL MODE SCREEN Mode 6: External The Global Analog Mode 6 External Screen was created to generate the analog value of the analog global depending on how a analog value from an external function or program. You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected, and then pressing <Enter>. Low Limit High limit Examples: The analog value from a global bridge which needs the WCC Utility program running, the Dual Valve mode where this global would control the second valve, or a external program that is designed for the WCC system. The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value. When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar> until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>. Global Value ____ comes from external device. If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a number which will serve as the alarm limit. If you select “Address,” you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog to be used as the alarm limit. This is the value that comes from the external device. You can enter a number in this location but it will automatically default to the value from the external device when you exit this screen. Range The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range. If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is outside the limits specified. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <None, Inside, Outside> 3-146 Type Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) Message # Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Actuator/Valve Control Useful Analog Actuator/Valve Control Information Manually or solenoid operated ball valves can be closed quickly, and thus there is a danger of water hammer. Some ball valves are equipped with an analog controlled actuator that may be then motor operated. These valves can be used either for on/off or flow control. A flow control valve may also be equipped with a feed back potentiometer for additional feed back control. In reduced port or more commonly known reduced bore ball valves, flow through the valve is one pipe size smaller than the valve’s pipe size, resulting in flow area being smaller than the pipe. As the flow discharge remains constant and is equal to area of flow (A) times velocity (V), A1V1 = A2V2, the velocity increases with reduced area of flow. A V port ball valve has either a ‘v’ shaped ball or a ‘v’ shaped seat. This allows the orifice to be opened and closed in a more controlled manner with a closer to linear flow characteristic. When the valve is in the closed position and opening is commenced, the small end of the ‘v’ is opened first allowing stable flow control during this stage. This type of design requires a generally more robust construction due to higher velocities of the fluids which might damage a standard valve. A trunnion ball valve has additional mechanical anchoring of the ball at the top and the bottom, suitable for larger and higher pressure valves (say, above 10 cm and 40 bars). Cavity filler Ball Valve—Many industries encounter problem with residues in the ball valve. Where the fluid is meant for human consumption, residues may also be a health hazard, and when the fluid changes from time to time, contamination of one fluid with another may occur. Residues arise because in the half open position of the ball valve a gap is created between the ball bore and the body in which fluid can be trapped. To avoid the fluid getting into this cavity, the cavity has to be plugged, which can be done by extending the valve seats in such a manner that they are always in contact with the ball. This type of ball valve is known as Cavity Filler Ball Valve. It is important to realize that most analog controlled valves are either controlled by a 0 to 10 volt or 2 to 10 volt control source which then must correspond to an actual 0 to 90 degree opening or closing of a typical quarter turn valve. All analog valves have what is called a throttling range. This analog valve throttling range is typically non linear and should be thought of as the useful control range for the analog valve. This range is typically rated at 20% to 80 % of the valves open position. There is no useful flow until the valve is at 20% open, and for all intensive purposes when the valve position is over 80% there is no more useful flow increase either. A ball valve is a valve with a spherical disc with a hole in it and is the part of the valve which controls the flow through it. There generally are three types of ball valves: Straight through, two way, and three way ball valves. Three-way ball valves have an L- or T-shaped hole through the middle of the valve. There are five general body styles of duplex ball valves: single body, three piece body, split body, top entry, and welded. The difference is based on how the pieces of the valve—especially the casing that contains the ball itself—are manufactured and assembled. The valve operation is the same in each case. In addition, there are different styles related to the bore of the ball mechanism itself: A full port or more commonly known full bore ball valve has an over-sized ball so that the hole in the ball is the same size as the pipeline resulting in lower friction loss. Flow is unrestricted but the valve is larger and more expensive, so this is only used where free flow is required, for example, in pipelines which require pigging. WCC III Technical Guide 3-147 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Dual Valve Mode Dual Valve Mode Dual Valve is used when two valves are used to control one output with parallel connection. Normally, one valve is a larger valve and the other valve is a small valve. The control input has to be from 0 to 100 with unit %. The valve size also is based on combined units %. The valve size of both valves should add up to 100 %. The Global Analog Dual Valve mode has three stages: During Stage 1, when the monitored analog input exceeds the Stage 1 Stage Up setpoint, the internal stage timer starts to run. When the internal stage timer exceeds Stage Time, the stage changes to Stage 2. The stage timer resets to zero when the monitored analog input is less than the Stage 1 Stage Up setpoint. The Dual Valve mode has 5 staging setpoints: During Stage 2, when the monitored analog input exceeds the Stage 2 Stage Up setpoint, the internal stage timer starts to run. When the internal stage timer exceeds the Stage Time, the stage changes to Stage 3. Or when the monitored analog input drops below Stage 2 Stage Down setpoint, the internal stage timer starts to run. When the internal stage timer exceeds the Stage Time, the stage changes to Stage 1. The stage timer resets to zero when the monitored analog input is between Stage 2 Stage Down setpoint and Stage 2 Stage Up setpoint. Stage 1 Stage Up setpoint Stage 2 Stage Up setpoint Stage 2 Stage Down setpoint Stage 3 Stage Down setpoint Stage Time During Stage 3, when the monitored analog input drops below the Stage 3 Stage Down setpoint, the internal stage timer starts to run. When the internal stage timer exceeds the Stage Time, the stage changes to Stage 2. The stage timer resets to zero when the monitored analog input is above the Stage 3 Stage Down setpoint. Stage Time is an internal stage timer counter for deciding whether to stage to/back next/previous stage. The timer will start to run when the condition is met, exceeding or dropping below the xx%. The timer resets when the condition disappears. If the stage timer exceeds the Stage Time, the Stage changes to next/previous stage. Since Dual Valve Mode has two outputs, the next very global analog has to be set to EXTERNAL mode for this Dual Valve operation to work. Stage 1: Valve 1 is modulating and Valve 2 is closed. Stage 2: Valve 1 is closed and Valve 2 is modulating. Stage 3: Valve 1 is full open and Valve 2 is modulating. 3-148 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Dual Valve Mode Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address ANALOG GLOBAL - DUAL VALVE MODE Mode 7: Dual Valve Control Input from: The Global Analog Mode 7 Dual Valve Screen was created to control two valves or two VFD controlled pumps (a primary and secondary) from one analog control point. It is not the same type of control as Lead/Lag control. In this field, a valid WCC III analog structured value must be used as an analog input value for this screen to operate correctly. Satellite Analog Input (XXXAY), Satellite Data Register “a”( XXXRYa), Satellite Data Register “b”(XXXRYb), Satellite Analog Output (XXXPY), Global Analog (GAZZZ), where XXX equals 1 to 239, Y equals 1 to 8, and ZZZ equals 1 to 256. NOTE: The very next Global Analog is the 2nd global analog value for Valve 2 and must be set to Global Analog Mode 6: External for proper operation. NOTE: The Data Pattern for both these globals need to be set up as XXX.X. NOTE: This input needs to be set up as a 000.0 to 100.0 (XXX.X) input, this is needed to represent 0 – 100%. Stage time: Stage time is the interval time for an internal stage timer counter that is used for deciding whether to stage to/ back to / next /previous stage. This Stage time is in Seconds. WCC III Technical Guide 3-149 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Dual Valve Mode Valve 1 size: One Valve/Pump flow size ratio may be a different size from the other. Example: An 6 inch pipe verse a 8 inch pipe—the total flow rate ratio would be 25% for valve 1 and 75% for valve 2. Both of the Valve sizes must add up to be 100%. V1 Fail – Modulate Valve 2, the proof of flow from Valve 1 has failed so Valve 1 opens to 50.0% and Valve 2 modulates. V2 Fail – Modulate Valve 1, the proof of flow from Valve 2 has failed so Valve 2 opens to 50.0% and Valve 1 modulates. Configuration: NOTE: Valve 1 should always be the smaller of the 2 valves. Valve 2 size: One Valve/Pump flow size ratio may be different size from the other. Example: An 6 inch pipe verse a 8 inch pipe—the total flow rate ratio would be 25% for valve 1 and 75% for valve 2. Both of the Valve sizes must add up to be 100%. NOTE: Valve 1 should always be the smaller of the 2 valves. Valve 1 proof of flow from: This field must have a valid WCC III binary input value and is used as a feedback mechanism to ensure that the valve/pump has actually turned on and is working properly. The proof of flow is checked when the valve opening is greater than 10.0%. There is a 2 minute proof of flow delay, if after 2 minutes there is no proof of flow (and Valve 1 is open more than 10.0%), valve 1 will open to 50.0% and valve 2 will modulate. If the proof of flow is fixed and re-detected, the valve will return to normal operation. Valve 2 proof of flow from: This field must have a valid WCC III binary input value and is used as a feedback mechanism to ensure that the valve/pump has actually turned on and is working properly. The proof of flow is checked when the valve opening is greater than 10.0%. There is a 2 minute proof of flow delay, if after 2 minutes there is no proof of flow (and Valve 2 is open more than 10.0%), valve 2 will open to 50.0% and valve 1 will modulate. If the proof of flow is fixed and re-detected, the valve will return to normal operation. Current State: This field displays the current state of the Dual Valves, and will be listed as Modulate Valve 1, Modulate Valve 2, V1 Open - Modulate V2, V1 Fail - Modulate V2, or V2 Fail - Modulate V1. This field displays the current condition of this global, it displays whether it is set up correctly or not. It will display either Normal, Next GA non-extern, Bad V2 Dn Threshold, BadV12 Dn Threshold, or Bad Valve Size. Normal – Everything is basically set up OK. Bad V2 Dn Threshold – the control input percentage for Valve 2 to close is greater than the control input percentage for Valve 2 to open. The percentage for Valve 2 to open should be more than the percentage for Valve 2 to close. Bad V12 Dn Threshold – the control input percentage for Valve 1 to close and Valve 2 to continue to modulate is greater than the control input percentage for Valve 1 to open and Valve 2 to continue to modulate. The percentage for Valve 1 to close and Valve 2 to continue to modulate should be less than the percentage for Valve 1 to open and Valve 2 to continue to modulate. Bad Valve Size – Valve 2 size is greater than Valve 1. One Valve/ Pump flow size ratio may be a different size from the other. Example: An 6 inch pipe verse a 8 inch pipe—the total flow rate ratio would be 25% for valve 1 and 75% for valve 2. Both of the Valve sizes must add up to be 100%. Valve 1 should always be the smaller of the 2 valves. Next GA non-extern – this means the next global analog is not EXTERNAL mode. The Dual Valve mode has two outputs. The next global analog has to be set to EXTERNAL mode for this mode to run. Modulation starts with Valve 1. During Valve 1 modulation, If the control input exceeds _____ % for more than stage time, Valve 1 will close and Valve 2 will modulate. This user input is a percentage, 0 – 100, for if the control input rises above this value for longer than the amount of stage time, then Valve 1 will close and Valve 2 will start modulating. Modulate Valve 1, Valve 1 is modulating and Valve 2 is closed. Modulate Valve 2, Valve 2 is modulating and Valve 1 is closed. V1 Open – Modulate Valve 2, Valve 1 is fully open and Valve 2 is modulating. 3-150 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Dual Valve Mode During Valve 2 modulation, If the control input drops below _____ % for more than stage time, Valve 2 will close and Valve 1 will modulate. This user input is a percentage, 0 – 100 (but less than the percent where Valve 1 closed and Valve 2 started), for if the control input drops below this value for longer than the amount of stage time, then Valve 2 will close and Valve 1 will start Modulating. If the control input exceeds _____ % for more than stage time, Valve 1 will full open and Valve 2 continue modulate. This user input is a percentage, 0 – 100, for if the control input rises above this value for longer than the amount of stage time, then Valve 1 will fully open and Valve 2 will modulate. During Valve 1 full open with valve 2 modulation, If the control input drops below _____ % for more than stage time, Valve 1 will close and Valve 2 continue modulate. This user input is a percentage, 0 – 100 (but less than the percent where Valve 1 fully opened and Valve 2 was modulating), for if the control input drops below this value for longer than the amount of stage time, then Valve 1 will close and Valve 2 will continue to modulate. Low Limit High limit The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value. When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar> until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>. If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a number which will serve as the alarm limit. If you select “Address,” you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog to be used as the alarm limit. Type Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) Message # Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen. Range The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range. If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is outside of the limits specified. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <None, Inside, Outside> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected and then press <Enter>. WCC III Technical Guide 3-151 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Proportional Mode Screen Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address ANALOG GLOBAL - PROPORTION MODE Mode 8: Proportion The Global Analog Mode 8 Proportion Screen was created to proportionally adjust a non linear analog value to a linear analog value. This is generally used to straighten the analog curve of a non linear device to a much truer linear curve. There are only two “correction” points that are utilized on this screen and they are a “starting point” and an “end point” for this simple linearization process. If more than two “correction” points are required, then use the Global Analog Mode 10 Multi-Proportion Screen. As value from ______ varies from _____ to ______ adjust the global from ______to______. A valid WCC III analog structured value must be used as an analog input value for this screen to operate correctly. Satellite Analog Input (XXXAY), Satellite Data Register “a”( XXXRYa), Satellite Data Register “b”(XXXRYb), Satellite Analog Output (XXXPY), Global Analog (GAZZZ), where XXX equals 1 to 239, Y equals 1 to 8, and ZZZ equals 1 to 256. Examples: As value from 1A1 varies from 45 to 75 adjust the global from 0 to 100. This changes or narrows the scaling range of sensor 1a1 from 45 to 75 to 0 to 100. This new scaling factor is this Global Analog’s value. As value from 1A1 varies from 0 to 500 adjust the global from 0 to 10. This changes or narrows the scaling range of sensor 1a1 from 0 to 500 to 0 to 10. This new scaling factor is this Global Analog’s value. Entering a value in this blank will allow this global analog to proportionally adjust a non linear analog value to a linear analog value. A starting value and an ending value is also required for both sides for this proportional adjustment to function. 3-152 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Proportional Mode Screen Range Type The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range. If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is outside the limits specified. Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Message # Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen. <None, Inside, Outside> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected and then press <Enter>. Low Limit High limit The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value. When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar> until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>. If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a number which will serve as the alarm limit. If you select “Address,” you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog to be used as the alarm limit. WCC III Technical Guide 3-153 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Dual Ramp Mode Screen Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address ANALOG GLOBAL - DUAL RAMP MODE Mode 9: Dual Ramp The Global Analog Mode 9 Dual Ramp Screen was created to help emulate the old WattMaster PI board in software. It basically uses the control set points of two control outputs on a satellite controller to control a single analog output on a satellite controller and should be used when controlling an analog actuator or VFD that needs to have an analog control setpoint. Ramp Up: This is the Analog Value (usually thought of as a upper end value of 100 that corresponds to 100%) that should go up in value when the “Control From” binary value is “ON” and is then gradually increased in value based upon the user programmable “Time” value in seconds. Ramp Down: NOTE: When both the Ramp Up and Ramp Down “Control From” binary control values are both “ON” then the global analog value will stop incrementing or decrementing in value. Control From: This is a binary “ON” or “OFF” value such as would come from a satellite’s control output or binary output. This satellite’s control output screens will also need to be set up for proper control of the control outputs. Limit: A high and low limit control point’s values should be entered here—a value of 0 to 100% that will corresponds to the position of a valve or the speed of a VFD controller. This is the Analog Value (usually thought of as a lower end value of 0 that corresponds to 0%) that should go down in value when the “Control From” binary value is “ON” and is then gradually decreased in value based upon the user programmable “Time” value in seconds. 3-154 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Dual Ramp Mode Screen Time: Low Limit High limit There are two time values that should be set here—time in seconds for the Ramp Up time to increase in value and Ramp Down time to decrease in value. These two Ramp Up/Ramp Down time values can be set independently so that one value may ramp up or down faster. 600 seconds equals 10 minutes. This Global Analog value should then be fed back into the Satellite controller’s analog output to actually control the actuator or VFD with a 0 to 10 Volt or a 2 to 10 Volt signal. The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value. When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar> until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>. Range The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range. If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is outside the limits specified. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <None, Inside, Outside> If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a number which will serve as the alarm limit. If you select “Address,” you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog to be used as the alarm limit. Type Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) Message # Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen. Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected and then press <Enter>. WCC III Technical Guide 3-155 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Multi-Proportion Mode Screen Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address ANALOG GLOBAL - MULTI-PROPORTION MODE Mode 10: Multi-Proportion Examples: The Global Analog Mode 10 Multi-Proportion Screen was created to proportionally adjust a non linear Analog value to a linear analog value. This is generally used to straighten the analog curve of a non linear device to a much truer analog linear curve. There are six “correction” points that are utilized on this screen and they are a “starting point” with four middle points and an “end point” for this multiple linearization process. All six of the correction points must be filled out appropriately. If only two simple “correction” points are required, then use the Global Analog Mode Proportion Screen. As value from 1A1 varies from 45 adjust the global to 0 55 30 60 45 65 60 70 75 75 90 As value from _ _ _ _ varies from _ _ _ _ adjust the global to _ _ _ _. As value from 1A1 varies from A valid WCC III analog structured value must be used as an analog input value for this screen to operate correctly. Satellite Analog Input (XXXAY), Satellite Data Register “a”( XXXRYa), Satellite Data Register “b”(XXXRYb), Satellite Analog Output (XXXPY), Global Analog (GAZZZ), where XXX equals 1 to 239, Y equals 1 to 8, and ZZZ equals 1 to 256. Entering a value in this blank will allow this global analog to proportionally adjust a non linear analog value to a linear analog value. A starting value, 4 middle values, and an ending value are also required for both sides for this proportional adjustment to function. 3-156 This changes or narrows the scaling range of sensor 1a1 from 45 to 75 to 0 to 90. This new scaling factor is this Global Analog’s value. 0 adjust the global to 100 200 300 400 500 0 30 45 60 75 90 This changes or narrows the scaling range of sensor 1a1 from 0 to 500 to 0 to 90. This new scaling factor is this Global Analog’s value. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Multi-Proportion Mode Screen Range Type The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range. If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is outside the limits specified. Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <None, Inside, Outside> Message # Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen. Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected and then press <Enter>. Low Limit High limit The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value. When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar> until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>. If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a number which will serve as the alarm limit. If you select “Address,” you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog to be used as the alarm limit. WCC III Technical Guide 3-157 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Pulse Start Mode Screen Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address ANALOG GLOBAL - PULSE START MODE Mode 11: Pulse Start The Global Analog Mode 11 Pulse Start Screen was created for opening and closing of a “sticky” valve control. Example: If you have a valve that does not act the same way opening as it does closing, then you may want to use this mode. Pulse Start Mode Pulse Start mode is used when the equipment needs an initial push to start to run. For example, some fans (inverter controlled) will not want start to run without initial high push voltage. The Pulse Start mode has two setup voltages—the push voltage/close voltage and pulse time. The push voltage is the required voltage to start the equipment. The pulse time, is the time in seconds that is required to start the equipment. The close voltage is the required voltage to close the equipment. The close voltage must to be less than the push voltage. As value from _____ starts above _____ sets this global to _____ for _____ Seconds. A valid WCC III analog structured value must be used as an analog input value for this screen to operate correctly. Satellite Analog Input (XXXAY), Satellite Data Register “a”( XXXRYa), Satellite Data Register “b”(XXXRYb), Satellite Analog Output (XXXPY), Global Analog (GAZZZ), where XXX equals 1 to 239, Y equals 1 to 8, and ZZZ equals 1 to 256. Example: As value from 1A1 starts above 1.0 sets this global to 2.5 for 15 seconds. As value from Satellite #1, Analog input #1 rises above 1.0 volts, this global will be set to 2.5 volts for 15 seconds then this global value will follow the analog input value until it drops below 1.5 volts. For example, the equipment’s push voltage is 2 volts, close voltage is 0.5 volts and pulse time is 2 minutes. When the monitored analog input is less than 0.5 volts, this output will be 0 volts. When the monitored analog input changes to 0.6 volt, this output start pulse will push the equipment by output 2 volts for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, this output will follow the monitored analog input to 0.6 volts. When the monitored analog input drops below 0.5 volts, this output will set to 0 volts and considered closed. 3-158 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Analog Global Pulse Start Mode Screen As the source value drops below _______, sets this global to ______. Otherwise, this global value will follow the source value. Low Limit High limit Example: The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value. When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar> until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>. As the source value drops below 1.5 set this global to 0.0 If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a number which will serve as the alarm limit. As the source value from Satellite #1, Analog Input #1 drops below 1.5 volts, this global will be set to 0.0 volts. If you select “Address,” you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog to be used as the alarm limit. Range Type The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range. If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is outside the limits specified. Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <None, Inside, Outside> Message # Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen. Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected and then press <Enter>. WCC III Technical Guide 3-159 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global Summary Screen Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address BINARY GLOBAL SUMMARY SCREEN BINARY Global Summary GB1 : GB2 : GB3 : GB4 : GB5 : GB6 : GB7 : GB8 : GB9 : GB10: GB11: GB12: GB13: GB14: GB15: GB16: GB17: GB18: GB19: GB20: Description Linux Global Linux Global Print Test Linux Global 1 2 3 4 5 6 Linux Global New Test Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global Linux Global GB 1 Message ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Time Date 08:56 1/21 State ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Alarm Time 15:40 01/16 15:40 01/16 The WCC III system has 512 binary globals. The term “binary” simply means a value which is represented by one of two conditions, ON or OFF. The term “global” means information which is shared by all of the satellite controllers in the system. Therefore, a “binary global” is an ON/OFF value which can be used by any satellite controller within the WCC III system. BINARY: The WCC III can generate the ON or OFF value of the global binary using either the Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm, Alarm by Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, and PWM, and Lead Lag mode of operation. Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired summary type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (If you select a summary type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen information. WCCIII Logical Addressing GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary, XXX = Global Binary Address 3-160 Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ANALOG, BINARY> To view or edit a specific binary global, simply position the cursor (shown as “>” along the left hand side of the screen) using the cursor positioning (arrow) to the desired point and press <Enter>. The Binary Global Screen for the specified point will now appear. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global Summary Screen Time / Date Alarm Time The present time and date will automatically appear at these locations. The WCC III system has the capability of alarming if the value of a binary global is either ON or OFF. The time that the alarm occurred is shown here. Description The description message which was entered on the Binary Global Screen is displayed here to aid you in identifying the different binary globals within the system. However, if a global alarm is active, the alarm class will appear on the Main Menu after the “Active alarms in classes:” statement. The alarm will also show on the Alarm Summary Screen. Acknowledge Alarms Message Specifies a message programmed into the Binary Global Screen, either one for the binary global OFF state or one for the binary global ON state, depending on what State the Binary Global is currently in. State The global binary alarms are acknowledged from the Global Binary Summary Screen by moving the cursor to the active alarm and selecting <Action> from the Top Menu Bar and then selecting <Acknowledge Alarm>. If the global binary value has returned to normal, the alarm message will be cleared from the screen. It can take up to 30 seconds before the alarm is cleared from the screen. There are two messages which appear under this heading. The first one is the On/Off message the user enters on the Global Binary Screen. The second will be one of the following messages which describe the current status of the global binary value. ON - The binary global is ON. OFF - The binary global is OFF. DUTYCYC - The binary global is OFF, because it has been overridden by the duty cycle program. SHED - The binary global is OFF, because it has been overridden by the shed/restore program. OVR - The binary global is forced ON and OFF due to a command on the override screen. WCC III Technical Guide 3-161 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global Screen Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN BINARY Global #: 1 Description: Global Binary 1 On Mode: 1 Combinatorial Value is ON when ANY of the following conditions are met. W1 is on default false In Local Set this global defaults to Last Value. -- Alarm -Set Condition: None Type 1 Name is GB1 Message #: 1 ON Off Message #: 2 OFF Message: 5 Global Alarm HOME for menu Binary Global #: ____ Specifies the global number and its type. Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <ANALOG, BINARY> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired global type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (If you select a global type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen information.) Specifies a short message which is displayed on Summary and Data Entry/Editing Screens to aid you in remembering points within the system. You may enter up to 20 characters (control, codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed). On Message #: ____ Off Message #: ____ Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for the binary global OFF state and the second for the binary global ON state. These numbers are used by the system to reference a textual message which is displayed in association with this binary global. If you would like to edit a different global, simply position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired global number, and press <Enter>. The new screen will automatically appear. name is ______ Specifies the name (point address) of this binary global. Any changes to the global number (above) will be reflected in this point address (e.g., BINARY Global #: 28 would show GB28 as the name). Description: ________________ 3-162 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global Combinatorial Mode Screen Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN COMBINATORIAL MODE BINARY Global #: 1 Name is GB1 Description: Global Binary 1 Mode: 1 Combinatorial On Message #: Off Message #: 1 ON 2 OFF Value is OFF when ANY of the following conditions are met. W1 is ON default false In Local set this global defaults to Last Value. -----------------------ALARM------------------------Set Condition: None Type: 1 Message 5 Global Alarm HOME for menu Mode: 1 Combinatorial Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm, Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM, Lead-Lag> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature. The Combinatorial mode has the capability of generating the ON or OFF value of the binary global using “and/or” logic. For example, binary global #1 (GB1) can be programmed to be ON if the outside air temperature is above 60 ºF, the building is in the day mode, and the chilled water pump is running. The WCC III system could then be programmed to turn on a chiller whenever GB1 is ON. The mode used to generate the ON/OFF value of the binary global using “and/or” logic is called Combinatorial because several statements are combined together to determine the ON or OFF value of the binary global. WCC III Technical Guide Value is ____ when ____ of the following conditions are met Specifies the state (or value) that the binary global will take if the specified conditions are true. Because these two fields are choice fields, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <OFF, ON> and <ANY, ALL> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired value and condition have been selected, and then press <Enter>. To understand how the combinatorial binary global works, a short description of logic is needed. The combinatorial global is read as “Value is (ON or OFF) when (ANY or ALL) of the following conditions are met.” The phrase “Value is (ON or OFF)...” simply states what value the binary global will have if and only if the rest of the phrase is a true statement. 3-163 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global Combinatorial Mode Screen This second part of the sentence reads as “...when (ANY or ALL) of the following conditions are met.” If the word “ANY” is selected, the binary global will take on the specific value if at least one of the statements following the sentence is true. If the word “ALL” is selected, then the binary global will take on the specified value if and only if all of the statements following the sentences are true. The logical equivalent for “ANY” is the boolean function “OR,” and the logical equivalent for “ALL” is the boolean function “AND.” _____ is ON default _____ is OFF default true false Next on the Binary Global Screen is a list of “statements” which are used to determine the “trueness” or falseness” of the binary global. These statements are constructed by entering the logical address of a particular point. This is best shown by the following examples: Value is ON when ANY of the following conditions are met: W2 is ON GB5 is OFF default FALSE default TRUE The segment of the screen shown above would read, “Value is ON when either week schedule #2 is ON or binary global #5 is OFF.” Note that the word “or” was used to describe the global. Value is ON when ALL of the following conditions are met: 1K1H is ON W6 is OFF default TRUE default FALSE This screen would read, “Value is ON when the 1H contact of satellite #1 is ON and week schedule 6 is OFF.” Again, note that the word “and” was used to describe the global. If a value or any of the point addresses specified by the user cannot be found, then the system will look at the command given in the “default” column. In other words, in the example given, if week schedule #6 (W6) cannot be found (i.e., it has not been set up), then the system will consider the statement “W6 is OFF” to be a false statement, and therefore it will assume W6 is ON. 3-164 In Local Set this global defaults to _____. Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost communications with the front end computer. Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Off, On, Last Value> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then press <Enter>. ------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None Type: 0 Message 0 The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this binary global is either ON or OFF. Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off. Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the page. <None, Off, On> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF Message Screen. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global Compare Mode Screen Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN COMPARE MODE BINARY Global #: _10 Description: Example Mode: 2 Compare Value is ON if Default value : name is GB 10 On Message #: Off Message #: 1A4 25.000 > 2A5 Hysteresis: 20.000 1 On 2 Off ± ---0.000 In Local Set this global defaults to Off. -------------------ALARM-------------------Set Condition: None Type: 0 Message: 0 HOME for menu Mode: 2 Compare Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm, Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM, Lead-Lag> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature. The compare mode generates the ON or OFF value of the binary global depending on how one analog value compares to another analog value. The Compare Screen allows the WCC III system to do “greater than/less than” logic. The ON or OFF value of the binary global is determined by one numerical value being [equal to], [greater than or equal to], [less than], or [less than or equal to] another numerical value. For example, the WCC III system could monitor the enthalpy (total heat content) of the outside air and the return air and select he air stream with the lowest heat content to be used for cooling. The Compare Screen could be used to cause binary WCC III Technical Guide global #2 (GB2) to go ON if the outside air enthalpy is less than the return air enthalpy, indicating that the outside air should be used for cooling. The WCC III system could then be programmed to open the outside air damper and lose the return air damper when GB2 is ON. Value is ON if Default value: 1A4 25 > 2A5 20 In the above example, the global binary will be ON when the value of 1A4 (analog input #4 on satellite controller #1) is greater than 2A5 (analog input #5 on satellite controller #2). If the analog value is unavailable, the system will use the default value below the analog value. For example, if satellite controller #1 was off-line, the value for analog input #4 on satellite controller would default to 25. Entering a Constant Number If you want to enter a constant for one of the two values, leave the top blank and enter a number in the default space as shown below: Value is ON if Default value: 1A4 25 > -----20 In the above example, the value of the global binary will be ON when 1A4 is greater than 20. 3-165 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global Compare Mode Screen Math Operators (>, = =, !=) In Local Set this global defaults to _____. The math operators are in a choice field and therefore the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost communications with the front end computer. CHOICE (>, ==, !=) Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <ENTER>. Math Operator Description > The statement is true when the value to the left of the symbol is greater than the value to the right. (Or, the statement is true when the value to the right is less than the value to the left.) == The statement is true when the value to the left is equal to the value to the right. != The statement is true when the value to the left of the symbol does not equal the value to the right of the symbol. Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then press <Enter>. ------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None Type: 0 Message 0 The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this binary global is either ON or OFF. Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off. <None, Off, On> This entry allows you to add hysteresis to the equation: 1A4 > 2A5 25 20 Hysteresis GA2 5 NOTE: The Value is On if and Hysteresis line must be addressable points. If left blank, the program will use the default values. In the above example, the value of 1A4 must be greater than 2A5 by the value of Hysteresis before the global will go ON. Also, the value of 2A5 must be less than 1A4 by the value of Hysteresis before the global binary will go OFF. If the analog value that is entered here (GA2 in the above example) is invalid or unavailable, the default value under the analog value will be used as the amount of hysteresis. You may also use [analog] point addresses such as analog inputs or global analogs. 3-166 <Off, On, Last Value> Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the page. Hysteresis Value ON if Default value: Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF Message Screen. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global External Mode Screen Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN EXTERNAL MODE Mode: 3 External Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm, Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM, Lead-Lag> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature. The Global Binary Mode 3 External Screen was created to generate the binary value of the binary global depending on how a binary value from an external function or program. WCC III Technical Guide Examples: The binary value from a global bridge which needs the WCC Utility program running, the Lead-Lag mode where this global would control the second unit, or a external program that is designed for the WCC system. Global Value ____ comes from external device. This is the value that comes from the external device. Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Off, On> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Although you can enter a desired choice here, this value will default to the state coming from the external device when you exit this screen. 3-167 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global External Mode Screen In Local Set this global defaults to _____. Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost communications with the front end computer. Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off. Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the page. <Off, On, Last Value> <None, Off, On> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. ------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None Type: 0 Message 0 The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this binary global is either ON or OFF. Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF Message Screen. 3-168 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global Alarm Mode Screen Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN ALARM MODE BINARY Global #: 2 Description: Linux Global Mode: 4 Alarm Name is GB5 On Message #: Off Message #: 1 On 2 Off Value is OFF if GA1 is active alarm and Current in Alarm and Alarm acknowledged In Local Set this global defaults to Last Value. Set Condition: None ALARM Type: 1 Message 5 Global Alarm HOME for menu Mode: 4 Alarm Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm, Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM, Lead-Lag> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature. The Alarm mode causes the binary global to generate an ON or OFF value based on either an active or non active alarm that has been either acknowledged or not acknowledged. Value is ON if 1A2 is active alarm and [Current in Alarm] and [Alarm not acknowledged] In the above example, the ON or OFF value of the global binary is determined by the alarm status of analog input #2 on satellite controller #1. When an alarm occurs, the alarm message will blink on the Analog Input Screen. After the alarm has been acknowledged, one of two things will happen. If the value of the analog input is presently within the alarm limits, the alarm message will disappear. If the value of the analog input is still outside the alarm limits, the message will stay on the screen, but it will quit blinking. WCC III Technical Guide The term “active alarm” means that the alarm has not been cleared. It is either a “blinking” or “solid” alarm within the system. The conditional statements are in a “choice” field and therefore the choices are shown at the bottom of the screen. <Current in Alarm, Current not in Alarm, NONE> <Alarm Acknowledged, Alarm not Acknowledged, NONE> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. [NONE] [NONE] When NONE is selected for both of the choice fields, the value of the global binary will change state (go ON in the above example) whenever the analog input specified on this screen is in an alarm condition, either unacknowledged (“blinking” alarm) or acknowledged (“solid” alarm). [NONE] [Alarm Acknowledged] When these choices are selected, the value of the global binary will go ON when the alarm for the analog input is acknowledged while the value of the analog input is outside the alarm limits. That is to say, the global binary will go ON whenever this analog input has “solid” alarm condition. 3-169 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global Alarm Mode Screen In Local Set this global defaults to _____. [NONE] [Alarm Not Acknowledged] When these choices are selected, the value of the global binary will go ON when the alarm for the analog input has not been acknowledged and remains a “blinking” alarm. [Current in Alarm] [NONE] When these choices are selected, the value of the global binary will go ON when the value of the analog input is outside of the alarm limits. [Current in Alarm] [Alarm Acknowledged] When these choices are selected, the value of the global binary will go ON while the value of the analog input is outside the alarm limits and the alarm has been acknowledged (“solid” alarm). [Current in Alarm] [Alarm not Acknowledged] When these choices are selected, the value of the global binary will go ON while the value of the analog input is outside the alarm limits and the alarm is unacknowledged (“blinking” alarm). [Current not in Alarm] [NONE] When these choices are selected, the value of the global binary will go ON when the value of the analog input returns inside the alarm limits, regardless of whether it has been acknowledged or not. [Current not in Alarm] [Alarm Acknowledged] When these choices are selected, the value of the global binary will go ON when the value of the analog input returns inside the alarm limits, provided it was acknowledged while it was outside the alarm limits. Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off. [Current not in Alarm] [Alarm not Acknowledged] When these choices are selected, the value of the global binary will go ON when the value of the analog input returns inside the alarm limits, provided it was not acknowledged while it was outside the alarm limits. Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the page. Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost communications with the front end computer. Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Off, On, Last Value> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then press <Enter>. ------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None Type: 0 Message 0 The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this binary global is either ON or OFF. <None, Off, On> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF Message Screen. 3-170 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global Alarm-By-Class Mode Screen Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN ALARM-BY-CLASS MODE BINARY Global #: Description: Alarm Mode: 5 Alarm-by-Class 1 Name is GB1 On Message #: Off Message #: 10 Alarm 11 Normal Value is ON when alarm class 0 is active and not acknowledged In Local Set this global defaults to LAST VALUE -----------------------ALARM------------------------Set Condition: None Type: 1 Message 5 Global Alarm HOME for menu Mode: 5 Alarm-by-Class Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm, Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM, Lead-Lag> For example, assume that all of the room temperatures in a building are assigned a level 3 alarm priority, and global binary #10 (GB10) is set to go ON when alarm class 3 is active and not acknowledged. GB10 will be ON when any room temperature is in alarm and has not yet been acknowledged. Value is ____ when alarm class X is active and not acknowledged X=1 to 8 Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature. Specifies the state (or value) that the binary global will take if specified conditions are true. Because the first field is a choice field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <OFF, ON> Alarm Classes 1 to 8 Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. The WCC III system has the capability of distinguishing between 8 different alarm levels or alarm types. Alarm type #1 has the highest priority and will be reported before alarm type #2, etc. The WCC III system has the capability to e-mail-out the first 5 alarm types or Alarm Levels. When the Alarm-by-Class mode is selected, the ON/OFF value of the global binary is generated if any point within the system that is assigned to this alarm type goes into alarm. WCC III Technical Guide The phrase “Value is (On or Off)...” simply states what value the binary global will have if and only if the rest of the phrase is a true statement. This second part of the sentence reads as “when alarm class (X) is active and not acknowledged.” The “X” stands for the alarm class number. There are eight different alarm classes or types, numbered from 1-8. Alarm type #1 has the highest priority and will be reported before alarm type #2, etc. The WCC III system has the capability to e-mail out the first 5 alarm types or alarm levels. 3-171 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global Alarm-By-Class Mode Screen In Local Set this global defaults to _____. Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost communications with the front end computer. Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Off, On, Last Value> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then press <Enter>. ------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None Type: 0 Message 0 The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this binary global is either ON or OFF. Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off. Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the page. <None, Off, On> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF Message Screen. 3-172 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global One Shot Mode Screen Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN ONE SHOT MODE Mode: 6 One Shot Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm, Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM, Lead-Lag> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature. Value is ON for _______seconds when ________changes from Off to On. This is a three part statement. The first part is the amount of time this binary global will stay on when a binary value within the system changes state, either “Off to On”, “On to Off” or both “Off to On” and “On to Off”. This user-programmed amount of time is in seconds. The second part of this statement is the binary input that must change state for this global to be on. The third part of this statement is a choice field. The following list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <from Off to On., from On to Off., .> The One Shot mode causes the binary global to generate an ON value for a programmable amount of time based on a Binary value changing from “Off to On”, “On to Off”, or both “Off to On” and “On to Off.” Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature. The “ .” selection will cause this binary global to generate an ON value each time the programmed binary input value changes from either “Off to On” or “On to Off” WCC III Technical Guide 3-173 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global One Shot Mode Screen In Local Set this global defaults to _____. Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost communications with the front end computer. Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Off, On, Last Value> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then press <Enter>. ------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None Type: 0 Message 0 The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this binary global is either ON or OFF. Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off. Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the page. <None, Off, On> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF Message Screen. 3-174 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global Clock Mode Screen Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN CLOCK MODE Mode: 7 Clock Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm, Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM, Lead-Lag> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature. The Clock mode causes the binary global to generate an ON value for a programmable amount of time and then an OFF value for a programmable amount of time based on a binary input value being either “Off” or “On”. This global will constantly cycle off and on for the programmed amounts of time as long as the binary input is in the desired “On” or “Off” state. WCC III Technical Guide NOTE: Since this global is based on time (i.e. clock mode), if the binary input changes state during the “On” time or the “Off” time, then this binary global will change to the OFF value. If the binary input changes state again it will turn ON or OFF depending on what state this global should be in based on time. Example: Value is ON for 120 seconds and OFF for 120 seconds when 5L3 in ON. When 5L3 is initially turned ON, this binary global will turn on. After 20 seconds, 5L3 is turned OFF, so this binary global will turn off. After another 30 seconds, 5L3 is turned back ON; now this binary global will turn back on for the remaining 70 seconds and then go to the off mode for 120 seconds. 3-175 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global Clock Mode Screen When 5L3 is initially turned ON, this binary global will turn on. After 120 seconds this binary global will go into the off mode. After another 20 seconds, 5L3 is turned OFF, so this binary global will stay in the OFF mode. After another 30 seconds, 5L3 is turned back ON; now this binary global will stay in the off mode for the remaining 70 seconds and then go to the on mode for 120 seconds. Value is ON for _______seconds and OFF for _______when ________ is On. This is a four part statement. The first part is the amount of time this binary global will stay ON when a binary input value within the system is either “Off” or “On”. The second part is the amount of time this binary global will stay OFF when a binary input value within the system is either “Off” or “On”. These user programmed amounts of time are in seconds. The third part of this statement is the binary input that must be either “OFF” or “ON” for this global to be on and off for the programmed amounts of time. The fourth part of this statement is a choice field, the following list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: In Local Set this global defaults to _____. Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost communications with the front end computer. Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Off, On, Last Value> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then press <Enter>. ------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None Type: 0 Message 0 The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this binary global is either ON or OFF. Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off. <OFF, ON> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature. Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the page. <None, Off, On> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF Message Screen. 3-176 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global Delay Mode Screen Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN DELAY MODE Mode: 8 Delay Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm, Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM, Lead-Lag> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature. The Delay mode causes the binary global to be delayed turning ON after a binary input has turned on and delayed turning OFF after the binary input has turned off. Example: Value is delayed 60 seconds for 5L3. When binary input 5L3 is turned “On”, there will be a 60 second delay before this binary global will turn on. Once the binary input 5L3 is turned off, there will a 60 second delay before this binary global will turn off. NOTE: If the binary input is turned on then off before the delay time has expired to turn this binary global on, the binary global will turn on after the programmed delay and then turn off the programmed amount of time from the time the binary input was turned off. Example: Value is delayed 120 seconds for 5L3. If the binary input (5L3) is turned on and then turned off after 45 seconds, the binary global will turn on 120 seconds after the binary input was turned on and then the binary global will turn off after 45 seconds, which will be 120 seconds from the time the binary input was turned off. WCC III Technical Guide 3-177 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global Delay Mode Screen Value is delayed_______seconds for________ . This is a two part statement. The first part is a user-programmed amount of time in seconds this binary global will be delayed turning ON when a binary value within the system is turned “On” and delayed turning OFF when the binary input is turned “Off”. The second part of this statement is the binary input that must be “ON” for this binary global to be delayed for the programmed amount of time before turning on. In Local Set this global defaults to _____. Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost communications with the front end computer. Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Off, On, Last Value> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then press <Enter>. ------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None Type: 0 Message 0 The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this binary global is either ON or OFF. Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off. Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the page. <None, Off, On> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF Message Screen. 3-178 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global PWM Mode Screen Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN PWM MODE Mode: 9 PWM Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm, Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM, Lead-Lag> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature. WCC III Technical Guide The Global Analog Mode 9 PWM Screen was created for PWM control of a valve, solenoid, or heating element. PWM stands for Pulse Width Modulation. Pulse-width modulation (PWM) is a very efficient way of providing intermediate amounts of electrical power between fully on and fully off. The term duty cycle describes the proportion of on time to the regular interval or period of time; a low duty cycle corresponds to low power, because the power is off for most of the time. Duty cycle is expressed in percent, 100% being fully on. PWM works well with digital controls, which, because of their on/off nature, can easily set the needed duty cycle. PWM control can be used to reduce the total amount of power delivered to a load without losses normally incurred when a power source is limited by resistive means. This is because the average power delivered is proportional to the modulation duty cycle. 3-179 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global PWM Mode Screen PWM Mode In Local Set this global defaults to _____. The PWM mode monitor analog input and convert it to binary output with pulse width modulation. The PWM mode has three setpoints—PWM period, Maximum Input, and Minimum Input. When the monitored analog input exceeds Maximum Input, this binary will always be ON. When the monitored analog input drops below Minimum Input, this binary will always be OFF. When the monitored analog input is between the Maximum Input and Minimum Input, the binary will modulate between ON and OFF based on the monitored analog input value. For example, the PWM period is 100 seconds, the Maximum Input is 10, the Minimum Input is 0. When the monitored analog input is less than 0, this binary will be OFF all of the time. When the monitored analog input is above 10, the binary will be ON all of the time. When the monitored analog input is 5, the binary will be OFF for 50 seconds and ON for 50 seconds. When the monitored analog input is 3, the binary will be OFF for 70 seconds and ON for 30 seconds. When the monitored analog input is 8, the binary will be OFF for 20 seconds and ON or 80 seconds. Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost communications with the front end computer. Value is the modulation of ______ with period of ______ seconds. The “modulation of” is an analog input point within the system. A valid WCC III analog structured value must be used as an analog input value for this screen to operate correctly. Satellite Analog Input (XXXAY), Satellite Data Register “a” (XXXRYa), Satellite Data Register “b” (XXXRYb), Satellite Analog Output (XXXPY), Global Analog (GAZZZ), where XXX equals 1 to 239, Y equals 1 to 8, and ZZZ equals 1 to 256. The “period of” is the total amount of time in one cycle. This is the combined amount of time on and off in one cycle. The term duty cycle describes the proportion of on time to the regular interval or period of time; a low duty cycle corresponds to low power, because the power is off for most of the time. maximum value of _______ When the monitored analog input exceeds Maximum Input, this binary will always be ON. Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Off, On, Last Value> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then press <Enter>. ------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None Type: 0 Message 0 The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this binary global is either ON or OFF. Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off. Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the page. <None, Off, On> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF Message Screen. minimum value of _______ When the monitored analog input drops below Minimum Input, this binary will always be OFF. 3-180 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global Lead Lag Mode Screen Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN LEAD LAG MODE Mode: 10 Lead-Lag Operation based on: Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: This field must have a valid WCC III binary structured value that must be used as a binary input value for this screen to operate correctly. Satellite Binary Input (XXXLWW), Satellite Control “C” output (XXXkYc), Satellite Control “H” output (XXXkYh)), Satellite Binary Output (XXXOWW), Global Binary (GBZZZ), where WW equals 1 to 16, XXX equals 1 to 239, Y equals 1 to 8, and ZZZ equals 1 to 512. <Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm, Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM, Lead-Lag> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature. Lead-Lag Mode is a dual or two-stage control scheme to balance the operating run time between two units for redundant operation. Each time the current source (the binary point that this global’s operation is based on) is turned “ON”, this program will determine which unit to turn on, either Lead or Lag, based on the current Lead-Lag ratio and the current Lead-Lag run times. WCC III Technical Guide NOTE: The very next Global Binary is the 2nd global binary value for the lag (Secondary) and must be set to Global Binary “Mode 3: External” for proper operation. Proof of flow: This field must have a valid WCC III binary input value and is used as a feedback mechanism to ensure that the valve/pump has actually turned on and is working properly. 3-181 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global Lead Lag Mode Screen Current source status: Current run time: This field will display the current active state of the value that was programmed into the “Operation based on” field. List the current runtime of the lead or lag (Primary or Secondary) control in minutes. This field is reset by the Command field being RESET. Current Proof of flow status: This field will display the current active state of the value that was programmed into the “Proof of flow” field. Lead/Lag ratio: This field has four user-selectable options—50-50, 60-40, 70-30, and 75-25. The first number corresponds to the Lead (Primary) percent of operation, and the second number corresponds to the Lag (Secondary) percent of operation. Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the page. <50-50, 60-40, 70-30, 75-25> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Proof of flow delay: This is delay in minutes before switching operation of the Lead/ Lag control due to lack of flow. Could be hooked to a sail type switch for airflow or an “ON/OFF” pressure switch for piping. If there is no proof of flow within this amount of time the operation will switch to either Lead or Lag control depending on the current state of control. Example: if currently in Lead control and there is no proof of flow after the programmed amount of time it will switch to Lag control. If proof of flow is lost during the Lead (or Lag) control it may take up to the programmed proof of flow delay time in minutes to switch to the Lag (or Lead) control. NOTE: If the proof of flow delay has not been programmed (0 minutes) then this global will use 1 minute as the proof of flow delay. Current Lead/Lag ratio: The is the percentage of the Lead control being “ON” verses the Lag control being “ON”. It is calculated by Lead time / (Lead time + Lag time). This field is reset by the Command field being RESET. 3-182 Current Lead status: Displays the current state of the lead device (Primary) and should be either “ON” or “OFF”. Either the Lead or Lag should be “ON” but not both. The same applies to being “OFF”. Current Lag status: Displays the current state of the lag device (Secondary) and should be either “ON” or “OFF”. Either the Lead or Lag should be “ON” but not both. The same applies to being “OFF”. Current setup status: The current setup status is the status of the operation, and will be listed as the following: OK, Bad Source, Bad Proof, or Bad Next structure. When the current setup status is OK, it displays blank. When the current setup status is Bad Source, it displays “Bad Source” which means that the source address is not a correct binary address. When the current setup status is Bad Proof, it displays “Bad Proof “which means that the proof of flow address is not a correct binary address. When the current setup status is Bad Next structure, it displays “Bad Next Structure” which means the next structure is not EXTERNAL mode. The Lead-Lag mode has two outputs. The next global binary has to be set to EXTERNAL mode for this mode to run. Current Lead run time: Displays the current “Lead” (primary) run time in hours. This field is reset by the Command field being RESET. Current Lag run time: Displays the current “Lag” (secondary) run time in hours. This field is reset by the Command field being RESET. Command: Selects the “Reset” command for the resetting of the runtime fields for Current Lead Run time field, and the Current Lag Run time field. Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the page. <____, RESET> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Binary Global Lead Lag Mode Screen In Local Set this global defaults to _____. Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost communications with the front end computer. Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: <Off, On, Last Value> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then press <Enter>. ------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None Type: 0 Message 0 The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this binary global is either ON or OFF. Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off” to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off. Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the page. <None, Off, On> Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5) have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.) The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF Message Screen. WCC III Technical Guide 3-183 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Shed/Restore Screen SHED/RESTORE SCREEN Shed/Restore Program # 1 Shed/Restore based on input: and schedule: On Schedule 500.000 KW 450.000 KW Shed level: Restore level: Shed/Restore rate: Items to shed: 3A1 Off Schedule 700.000 KW 650.000 KW 1 minute/item GB21 GB29 GB22 GB30 GB23 GB31 W1 GB24 GB32 Default # of items shed: 8 Current # of items shed: 0 GB25 GB26 GB27 GB33 GB34 GB35 GB28 GB36 HOME for menu Shed/Restore Program #: Specifies the number of the program you are currently editing. The WCC III system has 10 shed/restore programs. Shed/Restore based on input: Specifies the [analog] point address that acts as the input signal source for this shed/restore program. For example, if you are monitoring the kW demand of a building, and the kW meter is connected to analog input #1 of satellite controller #10, you would input 10A1. You may also use global analog values for this input. and schedule: Specifies the [binary] point address that provides the schedule control of the shed/restore program. When this address is zero (or OFF), the OFF schedule mode is selected. When this address is one (or ON), the ON schedule mode is selected. This field must have a valid WCC III binary structured value that must be used as a binary input value for this screen to operate correctly. Satellite Binary Input (XXXLWW), Satellite Control “C” output (XXXkYc), Satellite Control “H” output (XXXkYh), Satellite Binary Output (XXXOWW), Global Binary (GBZZZ), where WW equals 1 to 16, XXX equals 1 to 239, Y equals 1 to 8, and ZZZ equals 1 to 512. 3-184 On Schedule Off Schedule Shed Level: Restore Level: When the [analog] input associated with this program rises to the shed level, the system will start turning off the binary globals which are listed as “items to be shed.” When the [analog] input associated with this program falls to the restore level, the system will start turning the binary globals listed as “items to be shed” back on. Shed/Restore rate: Specifies the time interval the system uses to turn the items on or off. For example, if you have a shed/restore rate of 1 minute per item, and the value of the analog input rises above the shed level, the system will shut off the first binary global (GB21 on the example screen) and wait one minute. If the analog input value is still above the shed level, the next global will be turned off (GB22 on the example screen). This process will continue (through GB36) until the value of the analog input is below the shed level. After the value of the analog input falls below the shed level, the system will not turn any binary globals back on until the analog value falls below the restore level. At this point, the system will start bringing the binary globals back on at the time interval specified by the shed/restore rate in reverse order starting with the last binary global that was shed. WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Shed/Restore Screen Default Number of Items to Shed: This input allows the system to “soft-start” the items after a power failure. For example, if you enter 3 for this input, this will stage the 3 items on at the designated shed/restore rate after the power has been restored to the WCC III - MCD. Item 3 will be turned on first and item 1 last. Current # of items shed: This location informs you of the number of item(s) which have been shed. Items to shed: The user enters the names of the binary globals which will be used in the shed/restore program. There may be up to 16 items entered per program. Only binary globals may be entered in these spaces, but some spaces may be left blank if desired. If a space is left blank, the system will pause for the amount of time specified by the shed/restore rate as it comes to the blank space. NOTE: To cause equipment to be turned off when the binary globals are turned off, use the binary globals listed on this screen to control the schedule of the equipment. For example, if you want to turn off a bathroom exhaust fan if the building kW reaches the shed level of 500 kW, as shown on the example screen, then you should control the bathroom exhaust fan based on a time clock mode which selects its “ON” schedule by a binary global as outlined below: 1. Enter a week schedule which corresponds to the schedule of the exhaust fan. For example, if you want the exhaust fan to be on during the day unless the kW demand of the building reaches its peak but off all the time at night, enter a week schedule which is “ON” during the day and “OFF” at night. 2. Create a binary global which is “ON” whenever the corresponding week schedule is ON. 3. Input the global binary on a time clock screen as the binary inputs that select the schedule. A portion of the time clock screen is shown below: Contact is: CLOSED in “On” Schedule Selected by: GB5 When GB5 is “ON,” the contact on the satellite controller is closed and the exhaust fan is on. When the building reaches its shed level, GB5 goes “OFF” which causes the contact to open which causes the exhaust fan to go off. WCC III Technical Guide 3-185 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Duty Cycle Screen DUTY CYCLE SCREEN Duty Cycling Program #: 1 Items to shed: 1 GB221 GB222 GB223 GB224 GB225 GB226 GB227 GB228 GB229 GB230 GB231 GB232 2 v v v v v v v v v v v v 3 v 4 v v v v v v v v v v v v <--> 5 Program is: 15 segments of: 1 minutes each Currently in segment #: 4 Segment 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v segment where item is off HOME for menu Duty Cycling Program #: Currently in segment #: Specifies the number of the program you are currently editing. The WCC III has 5 duty cycle programs. This area automatically displays which segment the duty cycling program is currently in. Program is: ____ segments Items to Shed: Choose how many segments you would like to set up for the duty cycling duration. There is a maximum of 15 segments for a duty cycle program. When a “v” (lower case v) has been input under a segment, the item will be off at this point for the amount of time entered above. Enter Global Binary values which will be duty cycled by this program. You may enter up to twelve items per program. Only Binary Global values may be used in this program. of: ____ minutes each A user entered value specifying the time interval of each segment. You may input a value of 1 to 60 minutes in this field. 3-186 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Duty Cycle Screen NOTE: To cause equipment to be turned off when the binary globals are turned off, use the binary globals listed on this screen to control the schedule of equipment. For example, if you want to duty cycle a bathroom exhaust fan, then you should control the bathroom exhaust fan based on a time clock mode which selects its “ON” schedule by a binary global as outlined below: 1. Enter a week schedule which corresponds to the schedule of the exhaust fan. For example, if you want the exhaust fan to be duty cycled from 8:00 am to 5:00 pm M-F and off the rest of the time, you would create a week schedule that is “ON” from 8:00 am to 5:00 pm M-F. 3. Input the global binary on a time clock screen as the binary input that selects the schedule. A portion of the time clock screen is shown below: Contact is: CLOSED in “On” Schedule Selected by: GB6 When GB6 is ON, the contact on the satellite controller is closed, and the exhaust fan is on. When GB6 is OFF, the contact opens which causes the exhaust fan to go off. The exhaust fan will be duty-cycled along with the binary global. 2. Create a binary global which is “ON” whenever the corresponding week schedule is ON. WCC III Technical Guide 3-187 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Proportional Reset Screen PROPORTIONAL RESET SCREEN Proportional #___1 Description: As Linux Proportional 4A2 varies from: 25.0 Deg F to: 75.0 Deg F, Adjust the setpoint(s) of 4k1h From: 200 Deg F to: 80 Deg F for the following EA Driver --------------Setpoints to be Affected---------------Schedule Schedule Alt. Sch. Alt. Sch. On Off On Off * Home for menu Proportional #: Specifies the number of the program you are currently editing. The WCC III has 160 proportional reset screens. The next two inputs on this line designate the range for the input value. In our example the outside air temperature range is from 0º to 60º. Description: Adjust the setpoint(s) of _____ A short message is entered here to help you remember what the reset schedule is used for. This input designates the location of the control output which is to have the setpoint adjusted. In our example, it is the location of the output which controls the hot water valve. “1k3h” means that the hot water valve is controlled by channel 3 of satellite controller #1. The last letter in this input is either an “h” or a “c.” If channel 3 on satellite controller is programmed using the EA Driver Screen, “h” is entered as the last letter. If channel 3 was programmed using Dual Limit Screens, “h” means the contact in the satellite controller which makes the “COM” to “H” terminals, and “c” means the contact in the satellite controller which makes the “COM” to “C.” As _____ varies from: _____ to: _____ The first input on this line is the value that is to serve as the analog input for the Reset Screen. For example, assume that we want to reset hot water temperature based on outside air temperature according to the following reset schedule: O.A. Temperature 0 ºF 60 ºF H.W. Temperature 200 ºF 80 ºF The analog input value is the outside air temperature sensor in the above example. The outside air temperature sensor is entered as “1A5” which means that the sensor is connected to channel #5 on satellite controller #1. Global analog values (GAn) can also be entered at this location. 3-188 Example: As 4A2 varies from: 0 Deg F to 60 Deg F Adjust the setpoint(s) of 4K1h From: 200 Deg F to 80 Deg F WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Proportional Reset Screen Designate Setpoint to be Affected (*) Dual High/Dual Low An asterisk (*) is placed under the setpoint that is to be changed according to the reset schedule. In the above example, the On schedule setpoint is reset with outdoor air temperature. Dual High or Dual Low means that the binary output which is being used to control the output device (i.e. hot water valve) is programmed using the Dual Limit Screen. The Dual Limit Screen has time following setpoints available: --------------Setpoints to be Affected-------------On Schedule EA Driver Off Schedule Alt. On Sch. Alt. Off Sch. * EA Driver EA Driver means that the binary outputs which are being used to control the output device (i.e. hot water valve) are programmed using the EA Driver Screen. An EA Driver Screen has the following setpoints available: On Schedule: Off Schedule: 160 ºF 120 ºF On Schedule CLOSED Off Schedule CLOSED Alt On Schedule OPEN Alt Off Schedule OPEN Between Between Between Between Low Limit 90 80 0.0 0.0 & & & & High Limit 130 ºF 120 ºF 0.0 ºF 0.0 ºF “Dual Low” is selected if the Low Limit setpoints are to be reset, and “Dual High” is selected if the High Limit setpoints are to be reset. Alternate On: 0.0 ºF Alternate Off: 0.0 ºF The “EA Driver” input on this line is a choice field which allows you to “tell” the system what screen has been used for the device being controlled (i.e. hot water valve). Since this is a choice field, the choices will appear on the bottom of the screen. <EA Driver, Dual High, Dual Low> Make your selection by using the arrow keys to move the cursor to this field, then press the <space bar> once for each choice. When the desired control type appears, press <Enter>. WCC III Technical Guide 3-189 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Proportional Reset Graph PROPORTIONAL RESET GRAPH This graph is accessed from the Proportional Reset Screen. To access the graph, select <Action> from the Top Menu Bar and then select <Plot>. The bottom of the graph shows the range of the input value along with the actual value of the input, and the left side of the scale shows the setpoint range along with the actual setpoint value. 3-190 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Tenant Override Utility List TENANT OVERRIDE UTILITY LIST Tenant Utility List # 1 Office Description: 1st Flr. East Access Code: [12345] Tenant Name: H/R Toys Personal Code: [1234] The equipment addressed by the following control outputs will be overridden by the Tenant Override Request Program: GL: GH: GC: Light Group: Heat Group: A/C Group: [2k1h] [2k2h] [2k3h] //// //// //// //// //// //// //// //// //// overridden time //// //// //// 00:00 00:00 00:00 HOME for menu To access this screen, select <Tenant Override> from the Main Menu. The user must have level 3 access to be able to access this screen. The WCC III system has 500 screens like the one shown above that allow the user to enter password information and designate the outputs which are to be overridden for the lights, heat, and A/C for up to 500 separate tenant designations. Tenant Utility List # Specifies the number of the program you are currently editing. 500 Utility Lists (or screens) are available. Office Description: The user may enter a description of the office to help in remembering which zone is controlled by which override screen. This description can be up to 12 characters. Access Code: This 5 digit number must be entered by the occupant when in the TenantOverride.exe Program. Tenant Name: A tenant name is entered here to help identify the tenant area assigned to this screen. This name can be up to 8 characters. Personal Code: The equipment addressed by the following outputs will be overridden by the Tenant Override Request Program: GL Light Group: [1k7c] [1k2h] [1k4h] //// //// GH Heat Group: [1k3h] //// //// //// //// GC A/C Group: [1k5h] [1k6h] //// //// //// The operator assigns the outputs which are to be overridden by entering data on this part of the screen. In the above example, the following binary outputs on the satellite controller will go “On” to turn the lights on when the tenant asks for lights: 1k7c - Satellite number 1, COM to C contact on channel 7 1k2h - Satellite number 1, COM to H contact on channel 2 1k4h - Satellite number 1, COM to H contact on channel 4 When the tenant asks for heat, the following outputs will control according to their occupied mode setpoints. For example, assume that the satellite controller is set to maintain 72ºF during the day (occupied period), and 65ºF during the night (unoccupied period). If a tenant comes in at 8:00 pm in the evening when the setpoint is 65ºF, and that tenant asks for the heat to be overridden, the heating setpoint will be changed to 72ºF. 1k3h - Satellite number 1, COM to H contact on channel 3 The cooling (A/C) override is similar to the heating override. The 4 digit number assigned to each tenant must be entered when in the TenantOverride.exe Program. WCC III Technical Guide 3-191 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS Tenant Override Utility List Tenant Override Screen #2 Caution: DO NOT enter the same output contact on two or GL2 goes ON when the lights are overridden ON GH2 goes ON when the heat is overridden ON GC2 goes ON when the cooling is overridden ON more separate Tenant Utility Lists. Use the “global” feature if several zones (offices) require the same piece of central equipment to be overridden. These global values are then used as inputs in a Global Binary Screen. Global Override Each category of equipment on each screen has a separate global value which automatically goes ON when that category is overridden ON. Tenant Override Screen #1 GL1 goes ON when the lights are overridden ON GH1 goes ON when the heat is overridden ON GC1 goes ON when the cooling is overridden ON In this example, assume that air handler #1 (AHU #1) is ON whenever global binary GB1 is ON. AHU #1 provides the cooling for the offices for the occupants listed on Tenant Override Screens 1, 2, and 3. When the cooling is overridden from a tenant listed on screen #1, GC1 will go ON, causing GB1 to ON, which in turn causes AHU #1 to go on. When the cooling category is requested from a tenant listed on screen 2, GC2 goes ON, which will also cause AHU #1 to go ON. overridden time The amount of override time remaining will be displayed here in an hour and minute format. When the override is not active, this portion of the screen will be blank. Example of Binary Global Screen - Combinatorial Mode BINARY Global #: Description: Linux Global Mode: 1 Combinatorial Value is ON _10 name is On Message #: Off Message #: 1 2 GB 10 On Off when ANY of the following conditions are met. GC1 is GC2 is ON ON default default false false In Local set this global defaults to Off. ----------------------ALARM----------------------Set Condition: None Type: 0 Message: 0 HOME for menu 3-192 WCC III Technical Guide WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS General Message Screen GENERAL MESSAGE SCREEN General Message 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: Test of the data in the fields of this screen. There should be enough spaces for this to work. You cannot use QUOTE MARKS on this page. All other characters work. AaBaCcDdEeFfGgHhIiJjKkLlMmNnOoPpQqRrSsTtUuVvWwXxYyZz1!2@3#4$5%6^7&8* 9(0)-+=~`,<.>/?\|]}{[:;’ HOME for menu The General Message Screen is used to provide important information to all users of the WCC III system. Any level user can write a message in the General Message Screen. To access this screen, select <General Message> from the Main Menu. General Message Start typing in the blinking field below the General Message title. You can type up to 20 lines of text. Each line can contain 69 characters. Once you have filled up a line of text or wish to go to the next line, press <Enter>. To erase characters, use the <Backspace> key. To erase a whole line of text, press <Ctrl> <Home> while the cursor is on that line. WCC III Technical Guide General Message on Main Screen As long as there is a message in the General Message Screen, there will be a “Message!” Icon located at the lower left of the Main WCCIII Screen to alert users of the message. They must go to the General Message Screen to read the actual message. To delete a message, you must press <Ctrl><Home> at the Home position on the screen or while at any single message line you wish to delete. A Level 3 password is required to delete messages. 3-193 WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS 3-194 WCC III Technical Guide